GE Healthcare LOGIQ 3 Ultrasound system Сервисное руководство
Below you will find brief information for Ultrasound system LOGIQ 3. This manual is designed to help you understand how to use the LOGIQ 3 ultrasound system. It covers the basics of operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. It also contains information on how to install, configure, and use the system in a variety of clinical settings. The LOGIQ 3 ultrasound system is a powerful and versatile tool that can be used to diagnose and treat a wide range of medical conditions. It is important to read this manual carefully before using the system. The LOGIQ 3 system is capable of a wide variety of imaging techniques, including B-mode, M-mode, Color Flow Doppler and Power Doppler imaging.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Technical
Publication
Direction 5122546-100
Revision 4
GE Healthcare
LOGIQ 3 Basic Service Manual
GE Healthcare
Operating Documentation
Copyright
©
2005-2009 by General Electric Co.
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Important Precautions
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
WARNING
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN
ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
AVERTISSEMENT
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.
• SI LE PRESTATAIRE DE SERVICES DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS
UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, IL INCOMBE AU CLIENT DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
• NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
WARNUNG
• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER
SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST
ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN, FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU
SORGEN.
• WARTEN SIE DIESES GERÄT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN
ANWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND
NACHVOLLZIEHEN KÖNNEN.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
i
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
AVISO
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO ESTÁ DISPONIBLE EN INGLÉS.
• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE.
• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL USUARIO O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES
PROVOCADAS POR DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, PROBLEMAS MECÁNICOS O
PELIGROS DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
ATENÇÃO
• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM
INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE PÔR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
AVVERTENZA
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN
INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
HOIATUS
• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.
• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
• ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE
VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
ii -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
VAROITUS
• TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.
• JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
• ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
• MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
•
ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.
•
ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ, ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ
ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ.
•
ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ
ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ
ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.
•
ΕΑΝ ∆Ε ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ, ΕΝ∆ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ
ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ, ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή
ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ, ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΥΣ.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS
• EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHET
Ő
EL.
• HA A VEV
Ő SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRŐ NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT,
AKKOR A VEV
Ő FELELŐSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE.
• NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A
KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK.
• EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ,
M
ŰKÖDTETŐ VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB
VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI.
VIÐVÖRUN
• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.
• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN
ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.
• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG SKILIÐ
ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.
• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.
iii
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
VÝSTRAHA
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.
• V P
ŘÍPADĚ, ŽE POSKYTOVATEL SLUŽEB ZÁKAZNÍKŮM POTŘEBUJE NÁVOD V
JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠT
ĚNÍ PŘEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO JAZYKA
ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPROVÁD
ĚJTE ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAŘÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI PŘEČETLI
TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
• V P
ŘÍPADĚ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MŮŽE DOJÍT ÚRAZU
ELEKTRICKÁM PROUDEM PRACOVNÍKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUŽEB,
OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENT
Ů VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP
PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO
JINÉMU RIZIKU.
ADVARSEL
• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.
• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.
• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE
PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN,
OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
WAARSCHUWING
• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS
VERKRIJGBAAR.
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
BR
ĪDINĀJUMS
• Š
Ī APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.
• JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZ
ĒJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMĀCIJA CITĀ
VALOD
Ā, NEVIS ANGĻU, KLIENTA PIENĀKUMS IR NODROŠINĀT TULKOŠANU.
• NEVEICIET APR
ĪKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATAS
IZLAS
ĪŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.
• Š
Ī BRĪDINĀJUMA NEIEVĒROŠANA VAR RADĪT ELEKTRISKĀS STRĀVAS
TRIECIENA, MEH
ĀNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISĪTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZ
ĒJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
iv -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
ĮSPĖJIMAS
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGL
Ų KALBA.
• JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG
Ų TEIKĖJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGLŲ,
VERTIMU PASIR
ŪPINTI TURI KLIENTAS.
• NEM
ĖGINKITE ATLIKTI ĮRANGOS TECHNINĖS PRIEŽIŪROS DARBŲ, NEBENT
VADOVAUTUM
ĖTĖS ŠIUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR JĮ SUPRASTUMĖTE
• NEPAISANT ŠIO PERSP
ĖJIMO, PASLAUGŲ TEIKĖJAS, OPERATORIUS AR
PACIENTAS GALI B
ŪTI SUŽEISTAS DĖL ELEKTROS SMŪGIO, MECHANINIŲ AR
KIT
Ų PAVOJŲ.
ADVARSEL
OSTRZE
ŻENIE
ATEN
ŢIE
• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.
• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
• NINIEJSZY PODR
ĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU
ANGIELSKIM.
• JE
ŚLI FIRMA ŚWIADCZĄCA KLIENTOWI USłUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA
UDOST
ĘPNIENIA PODRĘCZNIKA W JĘZYKU INNYM NIŻ ANGIELSKI,
OBOWI
ĄZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TłUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA
KLIENCIE.
• NIE PRÓBOWA
Ć SERWISOWAĆ NINIEJSZEGO SPRZĘTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO
ZAPOZNANIA SI
Ę Z PODRĘCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM.
• NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI
Ę DO TEGO OSTRZEŻENIA MOżE GROZIĆ
OBRA
ŻENIAMI CIAłA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORA
ŻENIA PRĄDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU
ZAGRO
ŻEŃ.
• ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZ
Ă.
• DAC
Ă UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENŢI NECESITĂ O ALTĂ LIMBĂ
DECÂT CEA ENGLEZ
Ă, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ FURNIZEZE O
TRADUCERE.
• NU ÎNCERCA
ŢI SĂ REPARAŢI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR
CONSULT
ĂRII ŞI ÎNŢELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
• IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA R
ĂNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT
Ă NATURĂ.
v
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
ОСТОРОЖНО!
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
•
ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТСЯ
ТОЛЬКО НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ.
•
ЕСЛИ СЕРВИСНОМУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ КЛИЕНТА НЕОБХОДИМО РУКОВОДСТВО
НЕ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ, КЛИЕНТУ СЛЕДУЕТ САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНО
ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ ПЕРЕВОД.
•
ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ
К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ.
•
НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ УКАЗАННЫХ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ,
ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ, ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ
ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ, МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ
ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ.
UPOZORNENIE
• TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRU
ČKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.
• AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATE
Ľ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO
ANGLI
ČTINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOS
ŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVA
Ť SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI
NEPRE
ČÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRUČKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ.
• ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTI
Ť DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATE
ĽA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, PRÍPADNE DO MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO
NEBEZPE
ČENSTVA.
VARNING
D
İKKAT
• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.
• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA
ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST
OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
• BU SERV
İS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA İNGİLİZCE OLARAK SAĞLANMIŞTIR.
• E
ĞER MÜŞTERİ TEKNİSYENİ KILAVUZUN İNGİLİZCE DIŞINDAKİ BİR DİLDE
OLMASINI
İSTERSE, KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİNİN
SORUMLULU
ĞUNDADIR.
• SERV
İS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE
ETMEY
İNİZ.
• BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI ED
İLMESİ, ELEKTRİK ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKANİK
VEYA D
İĞER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNİSYENİN, OPERATÖRÜN
YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇAB
İLİR.
vi -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
vii
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY
All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to:
Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE Healthcare employees should use the iTrak System to report all documentation errors or omissions.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of the LOGIQ 3 Basic Service Manual (5122546-100).
viii -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
LEGAL NOTES
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare.
GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright© 2001-2009 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved
ix
x
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Revision History
LOGIQ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Revision
1
2
3
4
Date
June 30, 2005
October 20, 2005
March 13, 2007
March 25, 2009
Reason for change
Initial Release
Updated Release
Typo error of the part numbers corrected on the manual, Service notes added to the manual,FRU part numbers updated.
Updated Probe Leakage Current Test Procedure
Functional Checkout test procedures defined after each part replacement
New Service Notes Updated
Updated new FRU part numbers
List of Effected Pages
Pages
Title Page
Important Precautions
(pages i to X)
Table of Contents
(pages TOC1 to TOC6)
Chapter 1 - Introduction
(pages 1-1 to 1-18)
Chapter2-Preinstallation
(pages 2-1 to 2-8)
Revision
4
4
4
4
4
Pages
Chapter3-Installation
(pages 3-1 to 3-24)
Chapter4-Functional checks
(pages 4-1 to 4-14)
Chapter5-Components And functions
(pages 5-1 to 5-12)
Chapter6-Scan Adjustments
(pages 6-1 to 6-2)
Chapter7-Trouble Shooting and
Diagnostics
(pages 7-1 to 7-2)
Revision
4
4
4
4
4
Pages
Chapter8-Replacement
Proceduresn
(pages 8-1 to 8-28)
Chapter9-Renewalparts
(pages 9-1 to 9-8)
Chapter10-Care & maintenance
(pages 10-1 to 10-30)
Revision
4
4
4 index
Rear Cover
4
4
-
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
LOGIQ™ 3 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Purpose of OperatorManual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Important Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA / Europe Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
EMC, EMI, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
1
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 2
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Probes Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
2 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Moving into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Adjusting System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Product Locator Installation Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Checking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Probe (Transducer) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Storage And Operation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
Software Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Loading Base System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Software Compatible Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
3
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Before You Load Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Managing Data, Presets and Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Base Software Load Procedure For BEP Ver 2 , 3, & 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
GE Cares Sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
4 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Required Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Using CD-RW Drive/MOD Drive (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Adjusting the Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA/Europe Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
B Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
M Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Color Flow Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Measurement and Multi Image Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Image Management (QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Back End Processor Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Safety Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Probe/Connectors Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
5
6
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 5
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Types of Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Block Diagrams and Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Mid Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
CPU/Backend Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
VIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Patient I/O (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
External I/O on the Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Power Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
DC Power (Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
TX Power/HV Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Circuit Boards Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Mid Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
CPU/Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Mechanical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Common Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
-
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
Error Logs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
7
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 6
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Power Supply Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Access to Adjustments for LV Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Re-calibration the Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
8 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 7
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Diagnostic Procedure Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Service Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
SN-70411:Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
SN 73108: DO NOT USE LOGIQ 3 MONITOR FRU P/N: 2319551-7 . . . . 7 - 16
SN 73104:LOGIQ 3 FRU New Collector Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
SN 73102: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73069 Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
SN 73100: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73074 Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
SN 73098: LOGIQ 3 Debrief Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
SN 73097: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73060 OFFICIALLY CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
SN 73095: LOGIQ 3 BT05 New FRUs and compatibility matrix . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Sn 73092: Preventive Maintenance Of LOGIQ 3 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
Sn:73090 Location Of the Logiq 3 System Additional Label with Serial
Number information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Sn73084-Keyboard Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
Sn 73082: Introduction of FMI 73068,FMI 73070, FMI 73071 . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
Sn73081-Logiq 3 Win XP Systems with S/W R.4.x.x - Inclusion of Base and
Application Software CDs inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
Sn73080-LOGIQ™ 3 - Introduction of Improved Keyboard Assembly . . . . 7 - 39
Sn73078-BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 40
Sn73077-PC2IP Driver installation on BEP 2 System with PC2IP II board 7 - 48
9
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Sn73075-Introduction of New Receive Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53
Sn73074:Introduction of FMI 73066-Monitor MCU Replacement and
Brightness HV adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 55
Sn73073-Introduction of FMI 73069 for CHINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 58
Sn73064-CWD Option Kit Usage for LOGIQTM 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
SN-73061:Replacement of LOGIQTM 3 Hardware FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 60
SN-73058:Various Boards Used the LOGIQTM 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 61
SN-73056:Back Plane Board and Continuous Wave Doppler Board FRUs 7 - 62
SN-73055:Intermittent Hang Issues Related to the FEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
SN-73053:BACK UP AND RESTORE PROCESS IN LOGIQTM 3 . . . . . . . 7 - 68
SN-73051:Monitor Signal Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 71
SN-73050:Maintenance Mode in LOGIQTM 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
SN-73049:Hardware ID Generation on the ACI board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 74
SN-73048:Preset Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 77
10 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 8
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Monitor Assy (FRU No. 100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Monitor Cover Left (FRU No. 101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Monitor Cover Right (FRU No. 102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Monitor Cover Top (FRU No. 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Monitor Cover Front (Bezel) (FRU No. 104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Monitor Switch (S/W) Assy (FRU No. 105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Task Lamp (FRU No. 106) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Probe Holder (FRU No. 201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Speaker Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Keyboard TGC Assy (FRU No. 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
HUB PCB Assy (FRU No. 203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
A/N Keyboard Assy (FRU No. 204) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Keyboard Trackball Assy (FRU No. 205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Keyboard - Freeze Key Assy (FRU No. 206) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Power switch and Encoder PCB Assy (FRU 207). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
Keyboard Power Cable (FRU 208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31
Mechanicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Right Cover (FRU No. 300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Left Cover (FRU No. 301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Rear Cover (FRU No. 302) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White . . . . 8 - 39
Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Front Rubber Bumper Left (FRU No. 311) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Front Rubber Bumper Right (FRU No. 312) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White . . . . . 8 - 47
Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Top Cover (FRU No. 305) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
KeyBoard Bottom Cover (FRU No. 306) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
KeyBoard Bumper (FRU No. 307) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Left EMI Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
11
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Right EMI Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Rear EMI Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Nest EMI Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Front EMI Cover for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Front EMI Cover for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
VGP Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Handle Rod(FRU No. 400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Front Castor (FRU No. 401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Rear Castor (FRU No. 402) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Air Filter (FRU No. 403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Card Cage Fan Assy (FRU No. 404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 82
Rear Panel Assy (FRU No. 500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 82
Rear Panel1 (RP1) Board (FRU No. 501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Rear Panel2 (RP2) Board (FRU No. 502) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Rear Panel Interface (RPI) Board (FRU No. 503) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Front Panel (FRU No. 504) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Rear Panel Fuse (FRU No. 505) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
PCB Boards (FRU No. 601 ~ 605, 608, 609) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Connector Board Assy (FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White 8 - 97
Connector Board Assy (FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
Card Cage with Back Plane Board (FRU No. 607) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
BEP Assy (FRU No. 700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Hard Disc Drive (FRU no. 701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Compact Disc Read Write Drive (FRU no. 702) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
BEP Power Supply (FRU no. 703) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
PCVIC PCB (FRU no. 704) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
PC2IP PCB (FRU no. 706) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Power Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Transformer Assy (FRU No. 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
LVPS Disassy (FRU No. 801) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 121
AC Interface Board (ACI) (FRU No. 802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
Fuse (FRU No. 803) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Circuit Breaker (FRU No. 804) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Noise Filter(FRU No. 805) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Software Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
Installing Base System Software and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
12 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Base Load Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Base Load Software Load Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Optional Manual Drive Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Optional Manual Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Final System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137 serialno.txt File Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Optional Check Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Option Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 161
Loading Base and Application Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 163
Making BIOS changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 164
Base Software Load Procedure For BEP Ver 2 , 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 168
Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 171
13
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CHAPTER 9
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
Operator Console Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8
Mechanical Assembly’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
PCB Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
BEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Power Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Cables Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Option Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19
New FRUs for LOGIQTM3 Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20
Hardware FRU’s for LOGIQ3 BT’05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 21
Software FRUs for LOGIQTM3 Expert/PRO/Black and White. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
14 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CHAPTER 10
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic Maintenance Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Standard GE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
15
GE M
EDICAL
S
YSTEMS
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
16 -
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 1
Introduction
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1
1-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 3 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit.
Chapter Contents
Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1
Section
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Overview
Safety
Important Conventions
Safety Considerations
EMC, EMI, and ESD
Customer Assistance
Description Page Number
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-9
1-16
1-17
1-1-3 Purpose of Service Manual
This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 3 Ultrasound
Scanning System and contains the following chapters:
1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 3 .
3.) Chapter 3 - Installation Contains installation procedure with installation checklist.
4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics.
6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the LOGIQ™ 3 .
7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ™ 3 .
8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of replacement parts for the LOGIQ™ 3 .
10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the
LOGIQ™ 3 .
Chapter 1 1-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-1-4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual
• Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.).
• Hospital’s Service Personnel
• Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
1-1-5 LOGIQ™ 3 Models Covered by this Manual
L OG IQ 3 E xpert-B T'05
C onsole HC AT L ogiq 3 Model Name
H41772LM LO G IQ 3 E xpert C HILE /KO R E A MO DE L
H41772LN
H41772LP
H41772LR
H41812LE
H41772LT
LO G IQ 3 E xpert JAP AN MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 E xpert C HINA MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 E xpert INDIA MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 E xpert E UR O P E MO DE L with printer fixture
LO G IQ 3 E xpert AME R IC AS MO DE L
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
P S I C ode
ULO G 3I
ULO G 3I
ULO G 3I
ULO G 3I
ULO G 3I
ULO G 3I
L OG IQ 3 P ro-B T'05
C onsole HC AT L ogiq 3 Model Name
H41802LN LO G IQ 3 C HILE /KO R E A MO DE L
H41802LP
H41802LR
H41802LS
H41812LF
H41802LW
LO G IQ 3 JAP AN MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 C HINA MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 INDIA MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 E UR O P E MO DE L with P rinter fixture
LO G IQ 3 AME R IC AS MO DE L
P S I C ode
ULO G 3M
ULO G 3M
ULO G 3M
ULO G 3M
ULO G 3M
ULO G 3M
L OGIQ 3 B /W-B T'05
C onsole HCAT L ogiq 3 Model Name
H41802LZ LO G IQ 3 C HILE /KO R E A MO DE L
H41812LA
H41812LB
LO G IQ 3 C HINA MO DE L
LO G IQ 3 INDIA MO DE L
P S I Code
ULO G 3L
ULO G 3L
ULO G 3L
1-1-6 Purpose of OperatorManual(s)
The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 3 and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 1-2
Safety
1-2-1 Warnings
CAREFULLY READ ALL OF THE WARNINGS BELOW
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1.) The operator manual should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 3 and kept nearby for quick reference.
2.) Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 3 transducer is within AIUM/NEMA standards, unnecessary exposure should be avoided. Only trained personnel should operate the
LOGIQ™ 3 .
3.) To prevent electrical shock, the LOGIQ™ 3 should be connected to a properly grounded power receptacle. Do not use a three prong to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
4.) Probes are fragile, please handle with care.
5.) Concerning Outside Markings, refer to Figure 1-2 through 1-3 .
6.) For the cleaning, disinfection, and sterilization, refer to Probe section in LOGIQ™ 3 User Manual and Caution Sheet supplied with each probe.
NOTICE
This medical equipment is approved, in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference, to be used in hospitals, clinics and other institutions which are environmentally qualified. The use of this equipment in an inappropriate environment may cause some electronic interference to radios and televisions around the equipment. Proper handling of this equipment is required in order to avoid such trouble according to the operator and service manuals.This equipment can be used in residential areas only under the supervision of physicians or qualified technicians.
CAUTION
Improper performance possibility. Do not use the following devices near this equipment.
Cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter, radio-controlled toy, etc. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause this equipment to perform outside the published specifications. Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment
Chapter 1 1-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 1-3
Important Conventions
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1-3-1 Conventions Used in Book
Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
Safety Precaution Messages
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER
DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL
CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
WARNING
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION
Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE
Equipment Damage Possible
Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk.
Example: Disk Drive will crash.
NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure.
Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.
1-4 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-3-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Standard Hazard Icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle , as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons
(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-2 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-3 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
Chapter 1 1-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-3-3
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Product Icons
The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.
Table 1-4 Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL LOCATION
Identification and Rating Plate
Device Listing/Certification Labels
Type/Class Label
IP Code (IP68)
PURPOSE/MEANING
Manufacturer's name and address
Date of manufacture
Model and serial numbers
Electrical ratings
Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry safety standards such as UL or IEC.
Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection
Indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure per IEC 60529. IP68 indicates can be used in operating room environment.
Rear of console near power inlet
On each probe
Rear of console
Footswitch
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC
60878 indicates B Type equipment having a floating applied part
Probe connectors and PCG Connectors
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC
60878 indicates equipment having a floating applied part having a high degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.
ECG connector and Probes marked Type CF
“CAUTION
This unit weighs...
Special care must be used to avoid..."
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempt to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit.
On the console where easily seen during transport
1-6
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.
Various
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Various
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.
Various
Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 1-4 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
LOCATION
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch.
Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
ANUAL
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch.
CAUTION
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch.
CAUTION
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
Adjacent to On-Off/Standby Switch
Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth
(grounding) terminal.
Internal
Type CF Defib-Proof Applied Part (heart in the box with paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 878-
02-03
ECG Module
~
Alternating Current
Rear Panel, Circuit breaker label of Console and
Front Panel
"Non-Ionizing Radiation" indicates that the system applies RF energy.
Rear of console
Do not use the following devices near this equipment, Cellular phones, radio transceivers, mobile radio transmitters, radio controlled toy etc.
Use of these devices could cause this equipment to perform outside the published specifications.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Rear of console
This Symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorised representative for manufacturer for information concerning the decompositioning of your requirement.
Rear Panel
Chapter 1 1-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 1-4 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the
People’s Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
Rear Panel[For China Only]
M
ANUAL
1-8 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 1-4
Safety Considerations
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1-4-1
1-4-2
Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
Human Safety
Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 3 Training Seminar are authorized to service the equipment.
1-4-3 Mechanical Safety
WARNING
WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE
EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER.
WARNING
ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING
NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT
MAY BE DAMAGED.
CAUTION
Always lock the Control Console in its parking (locked) position before moving the scanner around.
The LOGIQ™ 3 weights approx 155kg (342lbs), depending on installed peripherals, when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed below could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.
CAUTION
ALWAYS:
• Be sure the path way is clear.
• Use slow, careful motions.
• Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 23 kg (50 lb.).
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
NOTE:
• Secure the unit in an upright position.
• Lock the wheels (brake)
• DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.
• Place the probes in their carrying case.
• Eject any CD (R/W) disk from the CD(R/W) Drive
• Remove the Footswitch and place it in a secure place
• Disconnect any other Off board peripherals if used.
Keep the Heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
Chapter 1 1-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-4-4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Electrical Safety
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the extension cord is greater than the system rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
CAUTION
If the Power Plug is Modified or replaced to Suit the local Conditions and regulations, Ground continuity check should be performed between Ground Pin on the Plug and a Metal Part on the
LOGIQ™ 3 .
1-4-5 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
NOTE:
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.
1-10 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-4-6 Labels Locations
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 1-1 Label Location
Chapter 1 1-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-4-6
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Labels Locations
(contd.)
Location:
1.) Grounding reliability Label
2.) CISPR Label
3.) CE Mark Label
4.) EIAJ Label
5.) TUV Label
6.) Tipping Caution Label
7.) Power Indication Label
8.) Prescription Device for US Only
9.) Gender Determination Label for Asia only
10.)Identification and Rating Plate
11.)WEEE Marking
12.)EFUP Label[For China Only]
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1-12 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-4-6
Label Locations (Cont’d).
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
For an explanation of the symbols shown in the illustration, refer to latter pages in this chapter.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Figure 1-2 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ 3
For an explanation of the symbols shown in the illustration, refer to latter pages in this chapter.
The CAUTION label for the radio influence is required to be attached on the console from April, 1996.
The GOST label is required to be attached on the console from June, 1998.
The Sex determination label is required to be attached on the console from September 2001, for Asia
Only
The labels shown in the Figure 1-2 are supplied with the consoles for Europe. They shall be attached on the console over the existing labels as necessary. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the labels.
Chapter 1 1-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-4-6
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Label Locations (Cont’d).
Labels at Front Panel
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 1-3 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ 3
1-14 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1-4-7
DANGER
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
EXPLOSION WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE
WARNING
ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN
ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT: BECAUSE OF THE DANGER
WARNING
OF INTERDICTING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR
PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
1-4-8 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA / Europe Only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the plug.
Chapter 1 1-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 1-5
EMC, EMI, and ESD
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1-5-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electro Magnetic Compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interface from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio-frequency or electromagnetic interface (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-5-2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
WARNING
1.)
2.)
Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector).
Follow general guide lined for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
1-5-3
NOTE:
CE Compliance
The LOGIQ™ 3 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements.
Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part18, IEC/EN 60601-1-2
For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-16 Section 1-5 - EMC, EMI, and ESD
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 1-6
Customer Assistance
1-6-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.
Prepare the following information before you call:
-
-
System ID serial number.
Software version.
For GE Service:
Chapter 1 1-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1-6-2 System Manufacturer
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 1-5 System Manufacturer
WIPRO GE HEALTHCARE- INDIA
WIPRO GE Healthcare Pvt. Ltd.
PLOT # 4, KADUGODI INDUSTRIAL AREA, SADARAMANGALA,
BANGALORE 560067, INDIA
TEL: (91) 80-41801000
FAX: (91) 80-2845-2924
1-18 Section 1-6 - Customer Assistance
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 2
Pre-Installation
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 2-1
Overview
2-1-1
2-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 2
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 3.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.
Chapter Contents
Table 2-1 Contents in Chapter 2
Section
2-1
2-2
2-3
Description
Overview
General Console Requirements
Facility Needs
Page Number
2-1
2-2
2-7
Chapter 2 2-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 2-2
General Console Requirements
PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-2-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Console Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements for LOGIQ™ 3 Scanners
Temperature
Humidity
Pressure
Operation
10 - 40 degree C
50 - 104 degree F
30 - 85% non-condensing
700 - 1060hPa
Storage
-10 - 60 degree C
14 - 140 degree F
30 - 90% non-condensing
700 - 1060hPa
Transport
-40 - 60 degree C
-40 - 140 degree F
30 - 90% non-condensing
700 - 1060hPa
Table 2-3 Environmental Requirements for an Ultrasound Room
Item
Power Source
Current Rating
Radiation Shielding
Temperature
Humidity
Heat Dissipation
Floor Landing
Floor Condition
Weight
Values
Refer to Table 2-4 on page 2-3.
10A (100V); 8.5A(115V); 5A(230V)
NONE REQUIRED for ULTRASOUND ENERGY
20-26 DEG. C (68-79 DEG F) for PATIENT COMFORT
50% to 70% for PATIENT COMFORT
1366 BTU/Hr.
Approximately 680 - 800 kg/m
2 without Accessories
Gradient: WITHIN 5 degrees
155 kg (342lbs) without Accessories
2-2-1-1
2-2-1-2
Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 3 is 1366 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300
BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.
2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-2-2 Electrical Requirements
NOTE:
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire (not shared with any other circuit) from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire (not shared with any other circuit) from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-3 Power Requirements
Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 3.
Table 2-4 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 3
PARAMETER AREA
Voltage Range
Power
Line Frequency
100V
230V
115V
All applications
All applications
Power Transients
Decaying Oscillation
All applications
All applications
LIMITS
100 VAC
±
10% (90-110 VAC)
230 VAC
±10% (207-253 VAC)
115 VAC
±10% (103-127 VAC)
MAX. 860VA
50/60Hz (
±2Hz)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.
Less than 15% of peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond.
2-2-3-1 Inrush Current
Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies.
2-2-3-2 Site Circuit Breaker
It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be ready accessible.
POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.
The LOGIQ™ 3 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and
DANGER possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.
Chapter 2 2-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-2-3-3
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Site Power Outlets
A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.
2-2-3-4
2-2-3-5
Unit Power Plug
If the unit arrives without the power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
Power Stability Requirements
Voltage drop-out / Max 10 ms.
Power Transients
Refer table 2-4
2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-2-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
EMI Limitations
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
LOGIQ™ 3 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include:
• medical lasers,
• scanners,
• cauterizing guns,
• computers,
• monitors,
• fans,
• gel warmers,
• microwave ovens,
• light dimmers
• portable phones.
• Lift
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See Table 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips.
Table 2-5 EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule Details
Be aware of RF sources
Ground the unit
Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
Replace all screws, RF gaskets, covers, cores
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.
Replace broken RF gaskets
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where
RF gaskets touch metal
Take care with cellular phones
Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified harnesses and peripherals
The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
Properly dress peripheral cables
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.
Chapter 2 2-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-2-5
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Probes Environmental Requirements
Table 2-6 Operation and storage Temperatures for Probes
ELECTRONIC
Operation:
Storage:
10 to 40 degree C(50 to 104 degree F)
-20 to 50 degree C(-4 to 122 degree F)
Temperatures in degree C, conversion to degree F = degree C*(9/5) + 32)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
NOTICE
Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES
OF -20 TO + 50(-4 to 122 degree F) degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE
VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS
BEFORE USE.
2-2-6
CAUTION
Time and Manpower Requirements
Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
Have two people available to deliver and unpack the LOGIQ™ 3.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.
2-6 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1
NOTE:
2-3-2
NOTE:
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser responsibility includes:
• Procuring the materials required.
• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpets are not recommended because they collect dust and create static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
Required Features
GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
• Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the unit’s proposed location
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide
• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for proper cooling of the system
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
Chapter 2 2-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
NOTE: peripherals.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The LOGIQ™ 3 has three outlets in the unit. One is for the on board peripheral and two for off board
• Power outlets for other medical equipment
• Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit
• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)
• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
2-3-2-1 Desirable Ultrasound Room Facilities
• Door is at least 92cm (3 ft.) wide
• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
• Lab sink with hot and cold water
• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
• Emergency oxygen supply
• Storage for linens and film
• Medical equipment storage
• Hospital grade equipment electrical outlet
• Analog telephone line for connection to InSite
• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
• Lockable cabinet for GE Software & proprietary manuals
• Trash bin.
2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-3-2-2 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan
Chapter 2 2-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-3-3
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Networking Pre-installation Requirements
2-3-3-1
2-3-3-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose of DICOM Network Function
DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements
To configure the LOGIQ™ 3 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide information to complete the form in Chapter 2 - Worksheet for DICOM Network
Information.
Information must include:
• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Sub Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 3.
• The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ™ 3 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.
2-10 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
GE H
EALTHCARE
GE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
2-3-3-2
.
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3
Host Name
AE Title
Local Port
ROUTING INFORMATION
.
.
.
Destination
IP Addresses
ROUTER1
ROUTER2
ROUTER3
DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION
NAME MAKE/REVISION
.
.
.
.
.
.
AE TITLE
Store 1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
IP ADDRESSES
.
.
.
ERVICE
IP Address
Net Mask
Default
.
.
.
.
.
GATEWAY IP Addresses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
M
ANUAL
PORT
Store 2
Store 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
Store 4
Store 5
Store 6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Work
List
Storage
Commit
MPPS
.
.
.
Figure 2-2 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2 2-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROPRIETARY TO GE
This page was intentionally left blank.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
2-12 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 3
Installation
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1
3-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to install the unit. Included are references to a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim
Chapter Contents
Table 3-1 Contents in Chapter 3
Section
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-1
3-2
3-2-1
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-3
3-4
Overview
Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
Safety Reminders
Moving into Position
Adjusting System Clock
Product Locator Installation Card
Preparing for Installation
Completing the Installation
System Configuration
Storage And Operation Requirements
Optional Peripherals
Connectivity Installation Worksheet
Loading Base System Software
Loading Application Software
Paperwork
Description Page Number
3-16
3-18
3-19
3-32
3-33
3-38
3-41
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-1
3-3
3-7
3-8
Chapter 3 3-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-1-3 Average Installation Time
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 3-2 Average Installation Time
Description
Unpacking the scanner
Scanner wo/options
Average Installation Time
Approximately 0.5 hour
Approximately 0.5 hour
Comments
Dependant on the required configuration
NOTE:
The LOGIQ™ 3 has been designed to be installed and checked out by an experienced service technician in approximately Four hours. LOGIQ™ 3 console with optional may take slightly longer.
For Installing Options average installation time is approximately between 0.5 - 2hrs depending on the required configuration
3-1-4 Installation Warnings
1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 3 weighs approximately 155 kg (342 lbs)without options, preferably two people should unpack it. Two people are also preferable for installing any additional bulky items.
2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
NOTE: For information regarding packing labels, refer to LABELS ON PACKAGE.
3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5
o
C increment in it's temperature, if it is below 10 o
C or above 40 o
C.
CAUTION
Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged
°C
°F hrs
60 55 50 45 40
140 131 122 113 104
8
35
96
30
86
25 20
77 68
6 4 2 0 0 0 0
Table 3-3 Time for Settlement
0
15
59
0
10
50
0
5 0
41 32
2 4
-5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
3-2 Section 3-1 - Overview
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-2
Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
When a new system arrives, ensure that none of the components are damaged or in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in Chapter 1.
The Packaging/Unpacking Procedure.
Topics discussed in the Packaging/Unpacking Procedure:
1.) Check the Shipment,
2.) Unpack the Unit,
3.) Handling Incomplete or Damaged Shipment
Please read these procedures before packing/unpacking the LOGIQ™ 3.
We strongly advice you to store the LOGIQ™ 3 packing material in undamaged condition in case of future transportation.
Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard. This may cause equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The crate with the LOGIQ™ 3 weighs approximately 195 kg. Be prepared for a sudden shift of weight as the unit is removed from its base (pallet).
CAUTION
Inspect the Shcik watch and Tilt watch. Ensure that they are not fused. (Refer to the instructions attached on the packing Box on howto check the Shcik watch and Tiltwatch)
1.) Cut the two Metal Bands.
Figure 3-1 Cutting the two metal bands.
Chapter 3 3-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section
3-2
Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
(cont’d)
2.) Lift the TOP Cover up and off.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 3-2 Removing the top cover
3.) Remove the Monitor Cap up and off...
Monitor Cap
3-4
Figure 3-3 Removing the Monitor Cap
Section 3-2 - Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-2 Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4.) Remove the three Plastic Joints from the Outer Sleeve.(Refer to the Labels on the Packing Box for more detailed instructions)
5.) Remove the Outer Sleeve.
6.) Remove the Inner Sleeve.
Inner Sleeve
Plastic Joint
Outer Sleeve
Palette Assy
Figure 3-4 Removing Plastic Joints and Sleeves
Chapter 3 3-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-2 Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7.) Remove the Plastic Wrapping around the LOGIQ
TM
3.
8.) Remove the Monitor Support and Monitor Packing.
9.) Remove the adhesive tapes attached at the four corners of the Top Cover.
10.)Put the Ramp Board on floor and prepare the slope to put the console down.
11.)Unlock the brakes on the front castors, then carefully put the console off the Palette.
3-6
Figure 3-5 Moving the LOGIQ™ 3 from the crate
Section 3-2 - Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-2-1 Safety Reminders
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
DANGER
WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH
THE UNIT!
If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate
CAUTION to its operating environment.
To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use
CAUTION a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION
Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.
Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
CAUTION
System performance and cooling require this.
OPERATOR MANUAL(S)
The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 3 and
CAUTION kept near the unit for quick reference.
ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD
Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 3 probe is within AIUM/NEMA
CAUTION standards, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
NOTE: Check the shipping container for special instructions. Verify that the container is intact. In some cases a secondary container may be used. If so, ask the carrier for unpacking instructions.
Figure 3-6 LABELS ON PACKAGE
Chapter 3 3-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-2-2 Moving into Position
CAUTION
Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard.
Do not tilt the unit more than 5 degrees to avoid tipping it over.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Possibility. Lifting the console by holding covers may damage the covers.
Do not lift the console by holding any covers.
In general, a single adult can move the LOGIQ™ 3 along an even surface with no steep grades. At least two people should move the machine when large humps, grooves, or grades are encountered. (It is better to pull from the rear rather than push from the front of the unit). Before moving, store all loose parts in the unit. Wrap transducers in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage.
Although LOGIQ™ 3 is a compact and mobile machine, two people should move it over rough surfaces or up and down grades.
3-2-3 Adjusting System Clock
Set the system clock for the LOGIQ™ 3 to the local time. For procedure of adjusting the system clock, refer to 4-5 Software Configuration Checks, in Chapter 4, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS.
3-2-4
NOTE:
Product Locator Installation Card
Fill out proper customer Information on the Product Locator Installation Card. Mail this Installation Card
“Product Locator” to the address corresponding to your pole.
The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.
3-8
PRODUCT LOCATOR INSTALLATION CARD
Section 3-2 - Receiving and Unpacking LOGIQ™ 3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-3
Preparing for Installation
3-3-1
3-3-2
3-3-2-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged.
Physical Inspection
Systems Voltage Settings
Verify that the recieved scanner is set to the correct voltage.
The Voltage ratings for the LOGIQ™ 3 Scanner is found on Rating label near the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system
3-3-2-2
3-3-3
3-3-4
CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 3 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL
MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
Video Formats
Check that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.This can be done in the Utilities menu.(Refer to Chapter 16 of the Basic Users Manual for the procedure for changinh the settings)
EMI Protection
This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.
Checking the Components
When a new system arrives, check that nonne of the components are damaged or in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in Chapter 1.
If the Power Plug is Modified or replaced to Suit the local Conditions and regulations, Ground continuity check should be performed between Ground Pin on the Plug and the Metal Part on
CAUTION the LOGIQ™ 3. Refer Section 10-6-4 for more details.
Chapter 3 3-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-4
Completing the Installation
3-4-1
3-4-1-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
System Specifications
Physical Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 3 unit are summarized in Table 3-4 on page 10 .
The Size of LOGIQ™ 3, with monitor and peripherals is shown in Figure 3-7 on page 11
Table 3-4 Physical Dimension of LOGIQ™ 3
Height
136
53.54
Width
49.0
19.29
Depth
96
37.79
Unit
cm inches
3-10 Section 3-4 - Completing the Installation
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
WEIGHT: 155kg (342lbs)
NOTE: Length is in mm
Variation: +/- 5%
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have 3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 3-7 OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Chapter 3 3-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-4-1-2 Weight with Monitor and without Peripherals
The Weight of LOGIQ™ 3 with monitor, without peripherals
Table 3-5 Weight of LOGIQ™ 3
Model
LOGIQ™ 3
Weight [Kg]
155
Weight [lbs]
342
3-4-1-3
3-4-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Acoustic Noise Output:
Less than 70dB (A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.
Electrical Specifications
Electrical conduit, junction boxes, outlets, circuit breakers, and switches should be in place before installing the LOGIQ™ 3 console
Table 3-6 Electrical Specification for LOGIQ™ 3
System
1
2
3
Voltage
100 ~ VAC
115 ~ VAC
230 ~ VAC
Current
10A
8.2A
4,1A
Frequency
50-60 Hz
50-60 Hz
50-60 HZ
3-4-3
NOTE:
3-4-4
NOTE:
3-4-4-1
Probe (Transducer) Connection
1.) Connect a transducer to the upper transducer receptacle as follows:
A.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever points towards the 9 o'clock position.
B.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface.
C.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to the 2 o'clock position to lock it in place. Twist the lever to the 9 o'clock position to disconnect the transducer.
It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
Connect the main power cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage checked during pre installation. Never use a three-to-two prong adapter; this defeats the safety ground.
Power On / Boot Up
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
Scanner Power On
1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground.
4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
3-12 Section 3-4 - Completing the Installation
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 3-8 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Transformer Assembly.
Chapter 3 3-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-4-4-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up
Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once.
3
Standby Switch
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3-4-5
NOTE:
3-4-5-1
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 3-9 Standby Switch for Back-end Processor Boot Up
When the Standby switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Power is distributed to the Front-
End, to the Peripheral outlets and to the Back End Processor. The Back End Processor starts and the software is initiated to start the scanner.
No status messages are displayed during this process.
Power Off/ Shutdown
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
Back-end Processor Power Down
1.) Press the Standby switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
3-14
Figure 3-10 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down
Section 3-4 - Completing the Installation
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-4-5-2 Scanner Shutdown
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Cable Clip
Mains Power Cable
Circuit Breaker
Figure 3-11 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system.
2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable if necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.
NOTICE
Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system.
The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
NOTICE
Chapter 3 3-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-5
System Configuration
3-5-1
3-5-1-1
System Configuration
System Settings
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 3-1 System Configuration
Configuration Category
Settings
Description
Enables the user or service personnel to set the date, time, unit, language, basic information about the organization such as the institution name and department.
1.) Power OFF the scanner.
2.) The SYSTEM EXIT window appears. Click on Logoff.
3-16
Figure 3-12 System EXIT window
3.) The message window appears. Click on OK.
4.) The OPERATOR LOGIN window appears.Change the User level to Admin, then enter Password,
Then Click on OK
Figure 3-13 Operator Login Window
Section 3-5 - System Configuration
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5.) Select Utilities > System
6.) Set the Hospital name, Department, Date and Time, Language, and Units.
7.) Click on Save the changes or cancel to revert back to previous settings.
8.) Click on Exit or Utilities to terminate the utility function.
Figure 3-14 Utilities Window
Chapter 3 3-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-6
Storage And Operation Requirements
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The LOGIQ™ 3 is shipped in a single container excluding PROBES. Shipping weight is approximately
430 lbs (195kg). The size of the container is B120 cm x W66 cm x H139 cm. (47 in. x 26 in. x 55 in).
Table 3-1 provides a summary of temperature, atmospheric pressure, and humidity tolerances for shipping, installation, and operation.
Table 3-2 STORAGE AND OPERATION REQUIREMENTS
Parameter
Temperature (Deg C)
(Deg F)
Atmospheric Pressure
(hPa)
Humidly (%)
(non-condensing)
Storage
-10 to 60
14 to 140
700 to 1060
30 to 95
Operation
10 to 40
50 to 104
700 to 1060
30 to 85
3-18 Section 3-6 - Storage And Operation Requirements
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-7
Optional Peripherals
3-7-1
3-7-1-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection
See the Internal and External I/O description in Chapter 5.
Approved peripherals
The tables below shows the suggested optional peripherals for LOGIQ™ 3. B/W Video Printer is the only On-board peripheral. All other peripherals are Off-board.
Table 3-3 List of Recording Devices
Device Manufacturer Video Signal
B/W Video Printer
B/W Video Printer
Video Cassette Recorder
Video Cassette Recorder
Video Cassette Recorder
A6 Color Video Printer
A6 Color Video Printer
A5 Color Video Printer
PC Printer
Color Video Printer
SONY
Mitsubishi
SONY
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
SONY
Mitsubishi
SONY
HP
Mitsubishi
Model
UP-895MDW
UP-D895MDW
UP-897MDW
UP-D897MD
P91W
P91DW
P93DW
SVO-9500MD
SVO-9500-MDP
MD3000E
MD3000U
AG-MD835P
AG-MD835E
UP-21MD
UPD-21MD USB
UPD-23MD USB
CP900UM
UP51MD
HP 990CXi
HP1200
HP6122
HP5652/HP5650
HPK550
CP 900E
CP 900DW
NTSC/PAL/USB
NTSC/PAL/USB
NTSC
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
NTSC/PAL
NTSC/PAL
NOTE:
Table 3-4 USB Devices
Device
USB
USB
Device
Name
JetFlashTS256
M
Data traveller
2.0
Manufacturer
Transcend
Kingston
Device Type
Digital
Digital
Memory Size
256MB USB 2.0 Flash Memory
512MB USB 2.0 Flash Memory
See each option installation instructions for installation and connection procedures.
Chapter 3 3-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3-7-1-2 Connecting Cables
Equipment damage possibility. Be sure to use the following recommended connecting cables to connect recording devices and a network with LOGIQ™ 3 console.Failure to do so would result
CAUTION in unstable system behaviour and can possibly damage the Equipment
Table 3-5 LIST OF CONNECTING CABLES
Name
Power Cable
Part No.
P9509EE
Figure NOTE
Use only approved IEC Couplers for peripherals connection to
System Rear panel
P9509MH
Used only for installing Peripherals on front panel of the console
RS232C Cable P9509MN For control signals
Mini-Plug Cable
P9509NA
P9509BE
Ethernet Cable 2195662
For InSite connection
For control signals (used only for B/
W video printer)
For DICOM capability Included in the DICOM Support option with
Transceivers
3-20 Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-1-3 Power Consumption of Optional Peripherals
Table 3-6 Power Consumption of Optional Recording Devices
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Device Manufacturer Model
Power Consumption
(VA)
NOTE:
B/W Video Printer SONY
UP-895MDW
UP-D895MDW
UP-897 MDW
UP-D897MD
B/W Video Printer
Video Cassette Recorder
Video Cassette Recorder
Video Cassette Recorder
A6 Color Video Printer
A6 Color Video Printer
A5 Color Video Printer
PC Printer
PC Printer
Mitsubishi
SONY
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
SONY
Mitsubishi
SONY
HP
Epson
P91W
P91DW
P93DW
SVO-9500MD
SVO-9500-MDP
MD3000E
MD3000U
AG-MD835P
AG-MD835E
UP-21MD
UP-21MD USB
UPD-23 MD
CP900UM
UP51MD
HP 990CXi
HP1200
HP6122
HP5652/HP5650
CP 900E
CP 900DW
At Any point of time, only one peripheral should be activated.
133
133
133
133
60
72
32
44
44
144
144
144
72
72
46
46
39
39
216
180
230
264
264
336
Chapter 3 3-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Available Probes
See in specification in the LOGIQ™ 3 Reference Manual for Probes and intended use.
See Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts for Part Numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes.
Table 3-7 LIST OF TRANSDUCERS
Probe Name
Material of
Headshell TYPE
Catalog
Number Part Number
3C
5C
PES
PES
8C PES
BE9C *
3.5C
3S
7S
8L
10LB
10L*
12L*
E8C
PES
PES
NORYL
NORYL
NORYL
NORYL
NORYL
NORYL
NORYL/PBT
Area of Using
Abdomen, OB/GYN,
Urology
Abdomen, OB/GYN,
Urology
Abdomen, OB/GYN,
Urology
Urology
Abdomen, OB/GYN,
Urology
Cardiac, Transcranial
Cardiac, Transcranial
Vascular, Small Parts,
Musculoskeletal, Masso sonography
Vascular, Small Parts,
Musculoskeletal, Masso sonography
Vascular, Small Parts,
Musculoskeletal, Masso sonography
Vascular, Small Parts,
Musculoskeletal, Masso sonography
TRANSVAGINAL
Convex
Convex
Convex
Convex
Convex
Sector
Sector
Linear
Linear
Linear
Linear
Micro_Convex
H40412LB
H40412LA
H41762LM
H40482LA
H4901PE
H4550SZ
H4000P
H40482L
H45202LM
H41762LK
H41762LL
H40412LE
2286354
2294516
2348094
2389382
2296158
2323337
2263669
5140738
2253846
2294523
2295377
2294641
NOTE:
NOTE:
3-7-3
* Indicates Probe Exclusive to LOGIQ 3 Expert
PES: Polyethersulfone NORYL: Modified Polyphenylene Oxide PU: Polyurethane
PBT: Polybutylene Terephthalate ABS: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
Connection to the Peripherals and Accessories can be established by connecting to the LOGIQ™ 3
Rear panel.
Located on the panel are video input and output connectors, audio input and output, footswitch connector, power connector and control connections for VCR, printer and service tools.
This section indicates the pin assignment for each connector (1 through 8).
3-22 Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
(cont’d)
.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 3-15 Rear Panel for 230V, 115V and 100V
Chapter 3 3-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
External I/O Connectors.
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3-24
Figure 3-16
Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
(cont’d)
Table 3-8 External I/O Connector Descriptions
Table Number
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Item
1
2
Connector Name
RGB Sync
S-Video Out
S- Video In
VGA Out
Audio Out
Audio In
Composite Video Out
Composite Video In
Shutter
Foot Switch
Ethernet
Service
Remote
USB
Printer
Table 3-16
Table 3-16
Table 3-17
Table 3-15
Table 3-14
Table 3-13
Table 3-9
Table 3-11
Table 3-12
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Description
BNC Connector, Color Output
4 pin mini-DIN
4 pin mini-DIN
DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female
RCA Phono Jack
RCA Phono Jack
BNC Connector, Color Output
BNC Connector, Color Input
Mini-phone Jack
Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S,
RJ-45 Connector
DSUB 9 pin male
DSUB 9 pin female
DSUB 25 pin female
Chapter 3 3-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
(cont’d)
1. Pin Assignment of Remote
Connector: D-SUB, 9 Pin, Female
NOTE:
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal
N/A
RXD
TXD
DTR
Pin No.
6
7
8
9
5 GND
Table 3-9 Pin Assignments of RS232C for Remote
Signal
DSR
RTS
CTS
N/A
Output level of RS232C signals:
Table 3-10 Output Level of RS232C signals
High
Low
+3V to +15V
-15V to 0V
2. Pin Assignment of RS232C for Service
Connector: D-SUB, 9Pin, Male
Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal
NA
RXB
TXB
Pin No.
6
7
8
Signal
DSR
RTS
CTS
4 DTR 9 NA
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Picture
Service
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Table 3-11 Pin Assignments of RS232C for Service
3-26 Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
(cont’d)
3. Pin Assignment of USB1 & USB2
Connector: USB
Pin No.
1
Signal
+5 VDC
Pin No.
3
Signal
DATA +
2 DATA 4 GND
Table 3-12 Pin Assignments of USB
4. Pin Assignment of Ethernet
Connector: RJ45
Pin No.
1
3
5
Signal
TX+
RX+
NA
Pin No.
2
4
6
7 NA 8
Table 3-13 Pin Assignments of Ethernet
5. Pin Assignment of Foot Switch
Connector: Circularr
Pin No.
Signal
3
4
1
2
SW1
GND
SW2
GND
5 SW3
Table 3-14 Pin Assignments of Foot Switch
Picture
Signal
TX-
RX-
NA
NA
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Picture
USB
Picture
8 1
Chapter 3 3-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-3 Peripherals/Accessories Connector Panel
(cont’d)
6. Pin Assignment of Mini-Jack
Mini-Jack:
Table 3-15 Pin Assignments of Mini-Jack
Pin No.
1
Output Signal
Print *
Picture
2 Signal Gnd
2
1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
* Printer starts printing by receiving the Low Pulse for more than 100 ms
7. S-Video Connector - 4Pin mini-DIN
Table 3-16 S-Video Connector, 4 Pin
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Output Signal
SVIDEO OUT/IN YG
SVIDEO OUT/IN CG
SVIDEO OUT/IN Y
SVIDEO OUT/IN C
Description
Y (Luma) GND
C (Chroma) GND
Y (Luma) SIGNAL
C (Chroma) SIGNAL
Picture
8. VGA Out - DSUB-HD22 15 pin female
Table 3-17 VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No
1
2
3
4, 9,11,12,15
5, 6, 7, 8, 10
13
14
Output Signal
VGA OUT1 R
VGA OUT1 G
VGA OUT1 B
N/C
GND
VGA OUT1 HS
VGA OUT1 VS
Description
Red
Green
Blue
N/C
GND
H Sync
V Sync
Picture
3-28 Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
9. 25 pin printer parallel Port DB-25 Connector.
Table 3-18 DB-25 25 - pin Parallel Port Printer
12
13
14
15
10
11
8
9
16
17
6
7
4
5
Pin No.
1
2
3
Description
Strobe
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
ACK
Busy
Paper Empty
Select
Auto Feed
Error
Initialize Printer
Select Input
18 - 25 GND
Picture
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 3 3-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-7-4 Video Specification
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Timing Parameter
Horizontal Rate [kHz]
Horizontal Period [
µs]
Pixel Clock [MHz]
H Blank Width
[µs]
H Sync Width
[µs]
H Front Porch
[µs]
Active Horizontal Period
[µs]
Vertical Rate [Hz]
Vertical Period [ms]
V Sync Width [lines=ms]
V Front Porch
[lines=µs]
Equalization Gate
[lines=µs]
Lines: Field/Frame
Active Lines/Frame
Table 3-19 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
1024x768
75Hz
13.33
32=0.53
3=50.00
1=16.66
800
768
60.02
16.66
78.75
3.66
1.22
0.20
13.00
75.03
768x576
50Hz
20.0
49=1.57
5=160.0
5=160.0
625/625
576
31.25
32.00
29.50
5.97
2.34
0.75
26.03
50.0
800x600
60Hz
16.58
28=0.74
4=105.60
1=26.4
628
600
37.88
26.40
40.00
6.40
3.20
1.00
20.00
60.32
800x600
75Hz
13.33
25=0.53
3=64.00
1=21.3
625
600
46.88
21.33
49.50
5.17
1.62
0.32
16.16
75.00
640x480
60Hz
16.68
45=1.43
6=190.70
6=190.7
525/525
480
31.47
31.78
24.55
5.70
2.36
0.73
26.07
59.94
1024x768
60Hz
16.67
38=0.79
6=124.10
3=62.00
806
768
48.36
20.68
65.00
4.92
2.09
0.37
15.75
60.00
3-30 Section 3-7 - Optional Peripherals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-8
Software Option Configuration
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Refer to the LOGIQ™ 3 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date
Format.
For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 3 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16, Customizing Your System.
For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 3 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.
Chapter 3 3-31
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-9
Connectivity Installation Worksheet
Site System Information
Site:
Dept:
LOGIQ SN:
Type:
Floor:
Room:
REV:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title
Phone
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Comments:
E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
Remote Archive Setup
Remote Archive IP:
Remote Archive Name:
Services (Destination Devices)
Manufacturer
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
Device Type Name
3-32
IP Address
Port
Section 3-9 - Connectivity Installation Worksheet
AE Title
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-10
Loading Base System Software
3-10-1 Software Compatible Matrix
The following table shows all s/w revisions happend to LOGIQ™ 3.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
3-10-2
3-10-3
For R4.1.X, BEP2, BEP3, and BEP4 Base Image software is made common to all LOGIQ3 models
(Expert, Pro, and B/W).
Before You Load Software
Save to CD-R or MOD any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or configured. Installing the base operating software destroys all patient data, images and system setups saved on the system.
Managing Data, Presets and Images
Before loading software, if you need to save Patient Data, Presets or Images, refer to 8-10-4 "Image
Management Guide" on page 8-146 .
Chapter 3 3-33
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3-34 Section 3-10 - Loading Base System Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-10-4 Base Software Load Procedure For BEP Ver 2 , 3, & 4
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers, all External Drives (USB
MOD, Flash Sticks, USB Memory etc.,), Switch Off peripherals like printers, VCR, VGP before installing Base Load.
1.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image as per BEP Type” into the CDROM drive and switch on the system. The following screen appears, Press any key to Continue.
NOTE:
Figure 3-17 Base Load Warning Message
2.)
Select 1
if the Patient Data on D drive was less than 2 GB and has been backed up using EXPORT function or
Select 2
if the Patient Data on D drive was greater than 2
GB, It will need to be backed up after the Upgrade using EzBackup function.
If the Patient image data is large and cannot be backed up by using ‘EXPORT’, It is recommended to select option ‘2’ i.e,Load Bootable C partition only..
Figure 3-18 Base Load Option Message
Chapter 3 3-35
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3.) You will see a screen showing Ghost. This automatically loads the base software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 10 mins).
Figure 3-19 Ghost Screen
4.) A message will be displayed when the process is completed.
Figure 3-20 Base Load Completion Message
3-36 Section 3-10 - Loading Base System Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-10-4 Base Software Load Procedure For BEP Ver 2 , 3, & 4
5.) Remove the CD-ROM
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
(cont’d)
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System
Software Load process.
6.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, properly turn off the scanner by pressing and holding power on button on keyboard for more than 20 sec’s.
7.) Turn the scanner back on. It will now boot up and automatically log on to start checking hardware and Device Manager. This is a normal and should be allowed to run to completion.
When booting up the first time it could take 30-90 seconds after the login box appears before the trackball and key board are active. Watch for the arrow cursor to appear.
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen.
Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Restart computer now”
(approximately 3 minutes after the desktop).
NOTE:
Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. PATIENCE! The process takes 3-4 minutes. Wait for the “Restart computer now” message to appear before activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel controls.
8.) Wait till you get a windows reboot message. This may take upto 3 minutes. On this message,
Click on NO as shown in the Figure 3-21 below.
This screen will look different with WIN XP
Figure 3-21 Windows Restart Screen
Select NO
Chapter 3 3-37
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-11
Loading Application Software
3-11-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Loading Applications Software
1.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM drive.
2.) Move the cursor using Trackball to find the “Start” command button on the Monitor screen
3.) Press the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the Screen and select “Run…”.
4.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware.bat” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Run Load Software
5.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 3-23.
3-38 Section 3-11 - Loading Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Loading Applications Software (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 3-23 Application CD Installation Popup
6.) Press ” Y” key twice to start the process.
7.) During Application Software loading process, the System will auto Shutdown.Manually switch on the System using the ‘standby- ON/OFF’ switch.
8.) After the software loading is completed, the system will pop-up a message, asking to make the selection for Presets according to location of site as seen in the Figure 3-24 below. Make the appropriate selection.
Figure 3-24 Preset Selection
9.) Wait until the system shuts down automatically (Approx 5 Minutes to shut down).
10.)Wait for Approx. 15 seconds.
11.)Power on the System and Remove the CD while it boots.
12.)The System pops up the Screen asking for Option Key. Enter the Basic Option Key
obtained on ordering of the BT’05 Upgrade.
Chapter 3 3-39
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-11-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
System Setup
To complete the system setup:
1.) Connect the system to the network if applicable.
2.) Select Utility>Connect>TCPIP Tab. For systems with S/W version lower than R2.2.0, the path is Utility>Connectivity>TCPIP Tab.
3.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually.
4.) Input the DICOM information.
* This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.
5.) After all information is entered select SAVE SETTINGS.
6.) If the system is NOT on a network you will need to input a set of "dummy" data for proper InSite and Diagnostic operation. Enter the following data if you are not on a network:
* Computer Name:
* IP Address: 3.192.28.253
* Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
7.) After all information is entered select SAVE SETTINGS.
8.) Reset the VCR by going to Utilities>System>Setup.
9.) Select Sony 9500 VCR and SAVE
10.)Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
11.)Do an auto-shut down
12.)Press the STANDBY switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
13.)Select SHUTDOWN from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 3-25 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down
3-40 Section 3-11 - Loading Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 3-12
Paperwork
NOTE:
3-12-1
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system.
Product Locator Installation
The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.
Figure 3-1 Product Locator Installation Card
Chapter 3 3-41
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3-12-2 GE Cares Sticker
Stick GE CARES sticker after Installation. Refer Figure 3-26 for details.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3
System ID
1-800-437-1171
For Service Call
GE CARES
AND REMEMBER
InSite
3-12-3
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 3-26 GE CARES Sticker Location
User Manual(s)
1.) User:Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.
3-42 Section 3-12 - Paperwork
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
This page was intentionally left blank.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 3 3-43
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3-44 Section 3-12 - Paperwork
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 4
Functional Checks
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 4-1
Overview
4-1-1
4-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 4
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 3 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments.
Chapter Contents
Table 4-1 Contents in Chapter 4
Section
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Description
Overview
Required Equipment
General Procedure
Functional Checks
Software Configuration Checks
Peripheral Checks
Safety Issues
Site Log
Page Number
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-10
NOTICE
Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 3
Basic User Manual (Direction number 5122538-100).
Look for the letters (BUM) after a section in the Table of Contents to determine if the information
is in this chapter or in the Basic User Manual.
Section 4-2
Required Equipment
• An empty (blank) CD R/W disk
• At least one transducer. (normally all the transducers used on the system should be checked).
Chapter 4 4-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-3
General Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CAUTION
SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable on the system.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
4-3-1
NOTE:
4-3-1-1
Power On/Boot Up
After turning off the system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
Scanner Power On
1.) Connect the Main Power Cable at the rear of the System
Protective earth must be taken care when connecting AC power cable without its plug to wall outlet.
2.) Ensure the retainer clamp slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
3.) Connect the Main Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet.
4.) Switch ON the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System.
4-2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up
(cont’d)
Circuit Breaker
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power Cable
Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker
When power is applied to the Scanner, and the Rear Circuit breaker is turned ON, Power is distributed to the Transformer Assembly. When the Control panel ON/OFF key is pressed once, Fans, Control
Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O’s, Nest Boards, Peripherals and the Back End Processor are given power. Back-end Processor boots up and the system starts in the scanning mode.
Press the ON/OFF (STANDBY) Switch on the Control Panel once.
3
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 4-2 Power On/Off Standby Switch Location
Chapter 4 4-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
(cont’d)
When the Standby switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
No status messages are displayed during this process.
4-3-1-2 Power Off
Purpose: This is a description on how to Shutdown the system.
1.) Press the ON/OFFkeys on the keyboard
2.) The System Exit dialog box is displayed on the monitor.
Select “Shutdown” from the System Exit dialog box.
4-3-1-3
Figure 4-3 System Exit Dialog Box
3.) The power off sequence begins. The system power turns off automatically when the power off sequence is completed.
Power Shutdown
1.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System once.
2.) The System Exit dialog box is displayed on the monitor.
Select “Shutdown” from the System Exit dialog box
3.) Switch OFF the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 3 .
4.) Disconnect the Main Power Cable if needed.
Using CD-RW Drive/MOD Drive (Optional)
Using CD-RW
4-3-2
4-3-2-1
NOTICE
Never move the unit with a disk in the CD-RW because the drive actuator will not be locked and the CD-RW could break.
1.) Use F3 to EJECT
NOTICE
Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the CDR-W susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other methods.
4-4 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
CD R/W Drive
Eject Button
3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
4-3-2-2
NOTE:
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 4-4 CD-RW drives
DON’T Use EJECT Button
Using MOD (Optional)
MOD can be installed through USB Port of LOGIQ™ 3
1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MO Drive. Also ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE
Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and the MOD could break.
3.) There are number of methods to eject a disk from the MOD. Ejection is automatic in some cases.
Manual ejection methods, listed in preferred order of use, are: a.) Press EJECT button on the MOD while system is ON.
b.) Press and hold EJECT button while the system is booting.
c.) Mechanical eject. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the EJECT button while system power is OFF.
NOTICE
Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other methods.
Chapter 4 4-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-3 Archiving and Loading Presets
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Always save presets before any software reload. This ensures the presets loaded after the software reload are as up–to–date as possible.
All user presets except changes to Summary, Anatomy, and Biometry pages, can be saved on an CD-
RW/MOD disk for reloading on the system.
NOTICE
Presets should NOT be saved on the same CD-RW/MO disk as images. The Archive Menu lists the images but does NOT list the presets stored on a CD-RW/MO disk.
4-3-3-1 Formatting CD(R/W)/MO Disk
1.) Insert an empty (blank) CD(R/W)/MO Disk into the Device Drive.
2.) Press the UTILITY Key on the Keyboard and select Connect> Removable Media. The Tools screen will be shown on the monitor. For Systems with S/W versions R2.x.x , Press the UTILITY
Key on the Keyboard and select Connectivity> TOOLS. The Tools screen will be shown on the monitor.
4-6
Figure 4-5 Formatting Removable Media
3.) Select the Media from the media list
4.) Type a name for the removable media in label field.
5.) Select FORMAT button.
Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-3-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Archiving Presets to an CD(R/W)/MO Disk
1.) Insert an empty (blank) formatted CD(R/W)/MO disk into the device drive.
2.) Press the UTILITY Key in the Keyboard and Select System> BACKUP/RESTORE. For systems with software version R2.X.X , Press the UTILITY Key in the Keyboard and Select System>
BACKUP. The Backup Screen will be shown on the monitor.
Figure 4-6 Backup Sheet
3.) Select the item to back up either from Resource Files.
4.) Enter backup destination or browse through the disk to locate the destination.
5.) Click on BACKUP the backup status for each item is displayed on the Result column.
6.) Make sure “Finished OK” is displayed on the Result column.
Chapter 4 4-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-3-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Loading Presets from an CD(R/W)/MO disk
1.) Insert the CD(R/W)/MO Disk with the archived Presets into the CD(R/W)/MO Disk.
2.) Press the UTILITY Key in the Keyboard and Select System> BACKUP/RESTORE. For systems with software version R2.X.X , Press the UTILITY Key in the Keyboard and Select System>
BACKUP. The Backup Screen will be shown on the monitor.
Click Here to
Restore Data
4-8
NOTE:
Figure 4-7 Restore Sheet
3.) Select the item to restore either from resource files.
4.) Click on Restore. A message to make sure the restore process is displayed on the monitor. Click
OK. The restore status for each item is displayed on the Result column.
5.) Make sure “Finished OK” is displayed on the result column.
This process will restart the System and all selectd Parametrs will be reloaded
Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-4 Adjusting the Display Monitor
4-3-4-1
4-3-4-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Brightness and Contrast
To adjust the brightness:
1.) Press the Center button of the display monitor twice.
2.) Press the Right button to increase brightness.
Press the Left button to decrease brightness.
The amount of brightness is shown on a slider on the screen.
To adjust the contrast:
1.) Press the Center button of the display monitor once.
2.) Press the Right button to increase the contrast.
Press the Left button to increase the contrast.
The amount of the contrast is shown on a slider on the screen.
Manual Degauss
To activate the manual degauss:
1.) Press the Center button until menu OSD appears on the screen.
2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast.
3.) Press the Decrease or Increase monitor adjustment button and select degauss now.
4.) Monitor degaussing is done.
4-3-5 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA/Europe Only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the plug.
NOTICE
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA / Europe only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable on the system.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
Chapter 4 4-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-4
Functional Checks
4-4-1
4-4-1-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Basic Controls
Alpha Numeric Keyboard
Table 4-2 Keyboard
Esc
Help (F1)
Word Delete (F10)
Arrow (F2)
Grab Last (F9)
Text1/Text2(F8)
Task
Home/Set Home (F7)
Expected Result
Exit current display screen.
Enter Online help / User manual.
Erase word associated with comment cursor.
Annotation arrow.
Activate the last selected data for edit.
Move annotation cursor to home position; shift+key to set current annotation cursor position as the new home position.
Switch between user text annotation overlays.
4-4-1-2 Keyboard Controls
Patient
B-Mode (Scan)
Report
Utility
Table 4-3 Keyboard Controls
Task
Application (Probe Indicator)
Expected Result
Enter Patient Demographic data screen.
Returns machine to scanning state and select scan mode.
Activates default report and touch screen of report choices.
Activates the machine’s configuration.
Indicates the 2 connected probes and selected application
4-4-1-3 Top and Sub Menu
Refer Operator Manual Chapter 4 for more details
4-10 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-2 B Mode Checks
4-4-2-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes listed in 3-5-3 Available Probe, in Chapter 3 Installation to the System probe connector.
2.) Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already))
3.) Perform the “Screwdriver Test” on the system, to ensure that that B-mode image is fine.Refer to
Chapter 7, Section 7-10-6 for more details on the “Screwdriver Test”.
Zoom
TGC
Scan
Area
Top Menu and Sub Menu
Controls
Patient
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
Mode
Parameters x y z
B > PD > CF
Utility Sub-menu Application
PW
M
Comment
Body Pattern
Ellipse
Measure
Clear
PDI
Depth
Zoom
M/D Cursor
Scan Area
Set
L
Auto
B Pause
R
Depth
Reverse
B Mode
Gain
Auto Optimize
Freeze
Figure 4-8 LOGIQ™ 3 B Mode Controls
Figure 4-9 B Mode Screen Picture Example
Chapter 4 4-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-2-2 B Mode OP Panel Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
Step
1
Press B Mode key
Task
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Adjust Depth
Adjust Gain
Adjust Time Gain Compensation (TGC)
Adjust Scan Area
Activate Auto Optimize
Adjust Zoom
Reverse
Table 4-4 B Mode Control Panel Controls
Harmonics (Activate Tissue Harmonics)
Expected Result(s)
B Mode Starts
Adjust the field of view. Increasing the depth may view larger/deeper structures rates, and decreasing the depth may view near the skin line.Turn Depth right/left to increase/ decrease. Depth displays on the monitor in cm.
Controls the amount of echo information displayed in an image. Turn B Mode dial to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain. Gain displays on the monitor in G (dB).
Amplifies the returning signals to correct for the attenuation caused by tissues at increasing depth. TGC slide pots spaced proportional to the depth. Move the slide pots to the left/right to decrease/increase TGC. A
TGC curve appears on the display.
Widen or narrow the size of the sector angle to maximize the image’s region of interest
(ROI). Press Scan Area and move the
Trackball to narrow/widen the angle.
Optimize the image based upon a specified region of interest or anatomy. Press the right
Auto control to activate.
Changes the location of the focal point(s). A triangular focus marker indicates the depth of the focal point.
Toggles the left/right orientation of the scan image.
Diminishes low frequency high amplitude noise and improves imaging. Enhances near field resolution for improved small parts imaging as well as far field penetration. Press
Harmonics Key to activate.
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4-12 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-2-3 B Mode Top and Sub menu Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10
11
12
13
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
16
Rejection
Colorize
Gray Map
Frequency
Biopsy
Line Density
Table 4-5
B Mode Top and Sub menu Controls
Task
Edge Enhance
Virtual Convex
Frame Average
Up-Down Invert
Dynamic Range
B Softener
Suppression
Focus Width
Power Output
Focus Position and Number
Expected Result(s)
Adjust rejection level. When this control is increased, low-level echoes are rejected and appear darker in the B image. Rotate Rejection to left/right to adjust the level. An index number is displayed on the
Top Menu to indicate the relative level of rejection.
Colorize the gray scale image to enhance the eyes’ discrimination capability. Rotate the Colorize Knob to cycle through the availabe color maps.
Enhance the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Press and turn Edge
Enhance left/right to cycle through the settings.
Displays a map window adjacent to the image.Rotate the Gray Map Knob to select the map. The image reflects the map as scrolled through the selections.
Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. Rotate Frequency and select desired value. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window.
Displays larger field of view in the far field. Press the Virtual Convex on Top Menu to activate.
This mode is Available only on the Linear Probes
Averages frames together and create more pixel, smoother image. Use the Paddle left/right switch to adjust the value. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
Flip the image vertically. Press Up-Down invert to flip up/down.
Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast. This Control is available on the Top Menu
Affects the amount of lateral smoothing
. This control is available on the Sub Menu
Suppress the Noise level.
Adjust the Width between two Focus points
Adjust Power Output Level
Increases the number of focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) to tighten up the beam for specific area. Press the control to toggle between Focus Position and Focus Number. Turn Focus Position left/ right to move the Focus. Press and Turn the Knob to adjust the focal numbers.
Biopsy guidelines appears.
Optimizes B-Mode frame rate or spatial resolution.
Chapter 4 4-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-3 M Mode Controls
4-4-3-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes listed in 3-5-3 Available Probe, in Chapter 3 Installation to the System probe connector.
2.) Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already)
M Mode
Gain
Top Menu and Sub Menu
Controls
Patient
1 2 3 4 5
1
2 x y z
B > PD > CF
Utility
Sub-menu Application
PW
M
Body Pattern
Ellipse
Measure
Comment
Clear
PDI
Depth
Zoom
M/D Cursor
Scan Area
Set
L
Auto
B Pause
R
CFM Mode
M/D Cursor
B Pause
Figure 4-10 Controls available in M Mode
4-14
Figure 4-11 M Mode Screen Picture Example
Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-3-2 M Mode OP Panel Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
Step
1
Press M Mode key
Task
2
3
4
5
Adjust Gain
Display M-Mode Cursor
B Pause
Table 4-6 M Mode OP Panel Controls
Activate M Color Flow Mode
Expected Result(s)
M Mode Starts
Controls the amount of echo information displayed in an image. Turn M Mode dial to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain. Gain displays on the monitor in G (dB).
Displays the M-Mode cursor on the B-Mode image. Press M/D Cursor and Trackball to position M-Mode Cursor.
Toggle between simultaneous and update presentation while viewing the M-Mode trace or Spectral Doppler. Press B Pause to toggle between simultaneous and update.
Overlays color on the M-Mode image using velocity and variance color maps. Press M, then CFM Mode key (or vice versa) to activate.
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 4 4-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-3-3
M Mode Top and Sub menu Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Rejection
Sweep Speed
Edge Enhance
Gray Map
Power Output
Colorize
Table 4-7 M Mode Top and Sub Menu Controls
Task
Full Timeline
Display Format
Dynamic Range
Expected Result(s)
Adjust rejection level. When this control is increased, low-level echoes are rejected and appear darker in the M image. Use Paddle left/right key to adjust Rejection level. An index number is displayed in the status window to indicate the relative level of rejection.
Changes the speed at which timeline is swept. Rotate Sweep Speed left/right to increase/decrease the value.
Enhance the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Press and Rotate Edge
Enhance left/right to cycle through the settings.
Displays a map window adjacent to the image. Rotate the Gray Map knob. The image reflects the map as scrolled through the selections.
Adjust Power output level.
Colorize the gray scale image to enhance the eyes’ discrimination capability. Press and Rotqte the
Colorize knob to select the appropriate color map.
Displays only timeline screen. Press the Full Time line to activate.
Select the format to display B image and M image on the monitor. Rotate Display Format knob and select from the Top Menu.
Enables control of the dynamic range or contrast of the image. When dynamic range is set high, the image is softer and more low-level data is visible. Turn Dynamic Range rotation knob left/right to increase/decrease the value.
4-16 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-4 Color Flow Mode Checks
4-4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes listed in 3-5-3 Available Probe, in Chapter 3 Installation to the System probe connector.
2.) Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already)
Patient
Top Menu and Sub Menu
Controls
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
Mode
Parameters x y z
B > PD > CF
Utility Sub-menu Application
PW
M
Comment
Body Pattern
Ellipse
Measure
PDI
Zoom
M/D Cursor
Clear
Depth
Scan Area
Set
L
Auto
B Pause
R
CFM Mode
Gain
Figure 4-12 Controls available in Color Flow Mode
Figure 4-13 CFM Mode Screen Picture Example
Chapter 4 4-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-4-2 Color Flow Mode OP Panel Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step
1
Task
Press CFM-Mode key
2
Table 4-8 Color Flow Mode OP Panel Controls
Adjust Gain
Expected Result(s)
CFM Mode Starts
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes processed in the Color Flow window. Turn the Gain dial
(CFM Mode key) to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain.
4-4-4-3 Color Flow Mode Top and Sub Menu Controls
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Threshold
Frequency
ACE
Baseline
Table 4-9 Color Flow Mode Top and Sub Menu Controls
Task
Packet Size
Color maps
Set Frame Average
Color Invert
Virtual Convex
Spatial Filter
Dynamic Range
Angle Steer
PRF / Wall Filter
Transparency Map
Expected Result(s)
Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops. Rotate Threshold Knob left/right to increase/decrease the gray scale threshold.
Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector. Rotate Packet Size left/right to increase/decrease the packet size.
Selects a specific color map. Rotate Color Map left/right to cycle through available maps.
Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. Press Frequency and select desired value.
The selected frequency is displayed in the status window.
Averages color frames. Rotate Frame Average left/right to smooth temporal averaging. The selected value displays on the Top and Sub Menu.
Views blood flow from a different perspective. Press Invert to reverse the color map.
The Region of Interest gets enlarged, covering more image area. This is available only in Linear
Probes.
Activates Spatial Filter
Enables control of the dynamic range or contrast of the image. When dynamic range is set high, the image is softer and more low-level data is visible. Turn Dynamic Range rotation knob left/right to increase/decrease the value.
Eliminates the motion artifacts. Press Ace on the Sub Menu to activate.
Slant the Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving probes. Click
Angle Steer to the left/right to slant the linear image.
Changes the spectrum baseline to accommodate higher velocity blood flow. Rotate Baseline left/right to adjust the baseline.
Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode indicated by Multiple gates.
Activates Transparency Map.
4-18 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-5 Doppler Mode Checks
4-4-5-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes listed in 3-5-3 Available Probe, in Chapter 3 Installation to the System probe connector.
2.) Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already)
3.) If Continuous Wave Doppler is available, Turn it on and Ensure that the Probe does not heat up immediately.
PW Mode
Gain
Patient
Top menu and Sub Men
Controls
1 2 3 4 5
1
2 x y z
B > PD > CF
Utility Sub-menu Application
PW
M
Body Pattern
Ellipse
Measure
Comment
Clear
PDI
Depth
Zoom
M/D Cursor
Scan Area
Set
L
Auto
B Pause
R
M/D Cursor
Figure 4-14 Controls available in Doppler Mode
Figure 4-15 Doppler Mode Screen Picture Example
Chapter 4 4-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-5-2 Doppler Mode OP Panel Controls
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step
1
Task
Press PW Mode key
2
3
4
Table 4-10 Doppler Mode OP Panel Controls
Adjust Gain
Display M/D-Mode Cursor
Audio Volume
Expected Result(s)
PW Mode Starts
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes processed in the Color Flow window. Turn the Gain dial
(PW Mode key) to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain.
Displays the M/D-Mode cursor on the B-Mode image. Press Cursor and Trackball to position sample volume graphic. Rotate SV gate to adjust sample volume gate size.
Controls Doppler audio output. Turn Volume left/right to adjust PW Doppler audio.
4-4-5-3 Doppler Mode Top and Sub Menu Controls
Step
1
8
9
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Rejection
Sweep Speed
Full Timeline
Display Format
Frequency
Angle Correct
Spectral Invert
Sample Volume Length
Spectral Average
Duplex / Triplex
Color Map
Table 4-11 Doppler Mode Top and Sub Menu Controls
Task
Trace Direction / Method
Dynamic Range
Auto Calculations
Adjust Angle Steer
Move Baseline
PRF / Wall Filter
Trace Sensitivity
Expected Result(s)
Adjust rejection level. When this control is increased, low-level echoes are rejected and appear darker in the PW image. Press Rejection Paddle left/right keys to adjust the level.
Changes the speed at which timeline is swept. Rotate left/right to increase/decrease the value.
Displays only timeline screen. Press the Full Time in the Sub-menu screen to activate.
Select the format to display B image and PW image on the monitor. Press Paddle switch and select from the Top Menu
Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. Press Frequency and select desired value. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window.
Optimizes the accuracy of the flow velocity. Rotate left/right to adjust the angle relative to the probe face
Vertically inverts the spectral trace without affecting the baseline position. Press invert to invert the spectral trace. The Plus and Minus signs on the velocity scale reverse when the spectrum is inverted.
Sizes the sample volume gate.Rotate SV lenght Knob to resize gate.
Activates Spectral Average.
Activates Duplex/Triplex Mode of operation
Colorize the gray scale image to enhance the eyes’ discrimination capability. Select the Color Map on the sub menu and select the approporiate map.
Provides automatic Trace of the Spectrum above and/or below the base line.
Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray. Click Dynamic Range Paddle key to increase/decrease the value.
Activates Auto Calculations of the Measurements
Slant the Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving probes.Rotate Angle
Steer to the left/right to slant the linear image.
Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing. Rotate Baseline left/ right to shift the baseline.
Adjust the velocity scale to accommodate faster/slower blood flow velocities. Rotate PRF left/right to select values
Activates Trace Sensitivity.
4-20 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-6 Measurement and Multi Image Checks
4-4-6-1 Performing B Mode Measurements Checks
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Measurement
Trackball
Patient
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
Mode
Parameters x y z
B > PD > CF
Utility
Sub-menu Application
PW
M
Body Pattern
Ellipse
Measure
Comment
Clear
PDI
Depth
Zoom
M/D Cursor
Scan Area
Set
L
Auto
B Pause
R
Set
Figure 4-16 Measurement Keys
Table 4-12 Measurement Checks
Step
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
Task
Generate the B image.
Press Freeze
Press MEASURE on the Control Panel to enter the Assign and Measure modality.
Trackball the cursor
Press Set.
Trackball the cursor
Expected Result(s)
A B image is active on the screen
Freeze the image to measure.
The measurement soft menu for the current exam category is displayed on the Monitor.
Select the appropriate exam category and measurement kind.
Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement
Anchor the start point of the measurement.
Move the cursor to the measurement end point.The current distance value is displayed in the Measurement result table and is instantaneously updated when moving the cursor
Chapter 4 4-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-7 Basic Measurements
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
4-4-7-1
NOTE:
NOTE:
4-4-7-2
Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements
1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays.
2.) To position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL.
3.) To fix the start point, press Set. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point
(tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL.
5.) To complete the measurement, press SET. The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
Before you complete a measurement:
To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE.
To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press CLEAR once.
To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn CURSOR SELECT.
After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point,
but not data entered onto worksheets, press CLEAR.
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement
1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays.
2.) To position the active caliper, move the TRACKBALL.
3.) To fix the start point, press SET. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL.
5.) Turn the ELLIPSE control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
4-22 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-7-2
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement (cont’d)
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
6.) To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (move the calipers), move the
TRACKBALL.
7.) To increase the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a counterclockwise direction.
8.) To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE.
9.) To complete the measurement, press SET. The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.
Before you complete a measurement:
-
-
To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press CLEAR once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.
To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press CLEAR a second time.
4-4-7-3 Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations.
There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Menu.
4-4-7-4
NOTE:
Report Pages
Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages.
This Feature is not yet fully functional on the LOGIQ
TM
3
4-4-8
4-4-8-1
4-4-8-2
Probe/Connectors Usage
Connecting a probe
1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not resting on the floor.
Activating the probe
Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the NTPUI.
The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically.
Chapter 4 4-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-8-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Deactivating the probe
When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode.
1.) Press the Freeze key.
2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions.)
3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-4-8-4 Disconnecting the probe
Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe.
1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port.
2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.
3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.
4-4-9
4-4-9-1
Using Cine
4-4-9-2
4-4-9-3
4-4-9-4
4-4-9-5
Activating CINE
Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to activate CINE. To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/
Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback. press Run/Stop.
Quickly Move to Start/End Frame
Press FIRST to move to the first CINE frame; press LAST to move to the last CINE frame.
Start Frame/End Frame
Turn the START FRAME dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
Turn the END FRAME dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed
Turn the LOOP SPEED dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame
Turn FRAME BY FRAME to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.
4-24 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-10
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Image Management (QG)
For Image Management functionality refer to the LOGIQ™ 3 Quick Guide. It talks about several topics:
• Clipboard
• Printing Images
• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image
• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation
• Starting an Exam
• Configuring Connectivity
• TCP/IP
• Services (Destinations)
• Buttons
• Views
• Verifying and Pinging a Device
4-4-11 Back End Processor Checks
If all the previous tests have been passed successfully, the backend processor is most likely OK. If the system seems to be operating erratically, Please refer to Chapter7, Diagnostic/Troubleshooting.
Chapter 4 4-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-5
Software Configuration Checks
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 4-13 Software Configuration Checks
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
6
Task to do Expected Result(s)
Check Date and Time setting
Check that Location (Hospital Name and
Department) is correct
Check Language setting
Check Units setting
Date and Time are correct
Location Name is correct
Language is proper
Units are proper
Check assignment of Printer Keys
Print1-4 Keys are assigned as desired by the customer
Check that all of the customer’s options are set up correct
All authorized functions are enabled
Adjust the Date and Time setting
Re-enter the correct Location Name
Set the proper Language
Set the local units
4-26 Section 4-5 - Software Configuration Checks
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-6
Peripheral Checks
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-14 Peripheral checks
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Task to do Expected Result(s)
Press(FREEZE)
Press (PRINT 1) or (PRINT 4) on the Control panel
Press VIDEO on the Control Panel.
Press VIDEO or B MODE on the Control Panel
Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.
Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.
Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. and the assignable play
Use the Assignable keys on the Control panel
Stop image acquisition.
The image displayed on the screen is printed on B&W or Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration.
To start the video counter at a different point: to return to the scanning mode to Start Recording
A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun
To Stop recording
The video status icon is changed to (Pause)
To start Play back an examination to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind or fast forward.
The video status icon in updated accordingly.
While in playback mode, use the TRACKBALL to adjust the video playback speed and scroll through the record.
To search on the tape
Press the assignable PAUSE
When playing back an examination
Press (FREEZE) while playing back a recorded session.
to stop the tape at the desired frame.
part of it can be stored on the computer’s memory as a cineloop.The cineloop enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see for further information on cineloop operation).
To store a recorded sequence as a cineloop. The last few seconds are stored as a cineloop.
Chapter 4 4-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-7
Safety Issues
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4-7-1 Probe/Connectors Check
Take the probes and check them as described below:
Table 4-15 Probe and connectors check
Step
1.
2.
3.
Test Each delivered Probe
Task to do
Test each probe in each connector slot
Expected Result(s)
it will display pictorial data on the screen
It will display pictorial data each time
Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
Turn the connector locking handle to the horizontal position.
Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
Rotate the locking handle to the full vertical position to lock in place.
Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor
To connect a probe:
CAUTION:
Do not allow the probe head to hang freely. Impact to the probe head may result in irrepairable damage.
4.
5.
Select the appropriate probe key on the Application Menu to activate the probe.
Key Light Indicators: - on the Probe
Off - no probe attached to probe port.
On: normal intensity - probe attaches to the probe port but not active.
On: high intensity - probe attached to the probe port and active.
The probe activated in the currently selected operating mode.
Previously Selected Application and Preseta are retained.
To select a probe and an application:
Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector.
Remove the connector from the port
Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case.
To disconnect probes:
The probes that are not connected to the unit should be stored in their storage case.
4-7-2
Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is on or off
Do NOT touch the patient and any of the connectors on the ultrasound unit simultaneously, including ultrasound probe connectors.
Take the following precautions with the probe cables: Keep free from the wheels. Do not bend.Do not cross cables between probes.
Power Supply Adjustment
There are no adjustments on the power supplies. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a component connected to that specific power outlet.
4-28 Section 4-7 - Safety Issues
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 4-8
Site Log
Table 4-16 Site Log
Date Service person Problem
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Comments
Chapter 4 4-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
This page was intentionally left blank.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4-30 Section 4-8 - Site Log
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5
This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 3’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.
Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5
Section
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-1
5-2
•
5-3
5-8
5-9
Overview
Block Diagrams and Theory
Top Console
External I/O on the Rear Panel
Peripherals
Power Diagrams
Circuit Boards Descriptions
Mechanical Descriptions
Air Flow Control
Common Service Platform
Description Page Number
5-10
5-11
5-14
5-26
5-1
5-4
5-9
5-10
5-27
5-28
Chapter 5 5-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-1-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
General Information
• LOGIQ™ 3 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and phono.
• The system can be used for:
-
-
-
-
2D Black-and-White imaging
2D Color Flow
M-Mode Black-and-White imaging
Color M-Mode
-
-
Pulse Doppler
Different combinations of the above modes
• Only LOGIQ™ 3 Expert supports 192 element Probes. It uses analog and digital delay to focus the beam. The analog delay is short and fixed. The digital delay is used for long delay and dynamic focus. This system also features many advanced image processing controls.
• Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, to the Mid Processors and
Back-End Processor, and finally to the monitor and peripherals.
• System configuration is stored on a hard disk and all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk on power up.
5-1-3
5-1-4
System Features
The key design goals of this system are:
-
-
-
-
-
High Image Quality
Increased User Productivity
Multiple Clinical Applications
Planned Upgrade ability
High Mobility
Types of Applications
The LOGIQ™ 3 is a general imaging system which supports many clinical uses. Scan and display parameters may be user selected to default to desired values for each application. The system presets many parameters to clinically determined, optimal values.
-
-
-
-
Radiology
Cardiology
OB/GYN
Vascular
The LOGIQ™ 3 system can be divided into an analog signal processing section, a digital signal processing section, and the microprocessor driven system control section, which controls the system based on operator commands and system status information.
5-2 Section 5-1 - Overview
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Name Plate
Monitor
Task Lamp
A/N Keyboard
TGC Slide pot Knobs
Track Ball
B/W Printer Tray (Option)
Hook for ECG Cables (Option)
Back-end Processor Chassis
Monitor Controls
Speakers
Top Menu Controls
Control Panel
Probe & Gel Bottle
Holder
Front Cover
Probe Connectors
ECG Module (Option)
CD
Front Bumper
Lock
Wheel
Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 3 Major Components
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Chapter 5 5-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Section 5-2
Block Diagrams and Theory
5-2-1 Block Diagram
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5-4
Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 3 Block Diagram
Section 5-2 - Block Diagrams and Theory
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-2 Front End
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The Front End Consists of Conn. Board, Transmit Board, Receive Board & Digital Beam Former.
Figure 5-3 The Front End
The Front End generates electrical signals which are transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to an 12 bit digital signal.
The digital representation of this signal is presented to the mid processor section.
RXB (Receive Board): The Preamplifier amplifies echo signals. The reception signals are sent to DBF.
DBF (Digital Beam Former): Performs receive delay summing for channels
TXB (Transmit Board): This has channel bipolar drivers, delay calculators.
Chapter 5 5-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-3 Mid Processors
RF Data from DBF
PGC Signal
CLK Signal to DBF & TXB
USC BUS
IIC BUS
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
I/Q data
Beamsum
18
COMSO
Line
Mem
Analog
Curve ctl
SH4 for scan control
Clock
Generation
ECL
SH
Local
Bus
EUSC interface
Memory/
Boot code
SH PCI
Sec PCI
I960 PCI
Bridge
Data interface control
FLASH
SDRAM
i960
Local Bus
DC Voltage
Monitoring
PCI Bus
LV Supply o/ps
HV Supply o/ps
Figure 5-4 The Mid Processor
This block performs the adequate signal conditioning for Tissue and Doppler. This block is implemented in FEC only.
• BEAM SUMMING: adds the beam data from the two OQ Card banks (3 each) to make the one scan vector in FEC (Front End Control) ASSY.
• COMSO: makes the B / I / Q image data by filtering, enhancing, LOG compression, envelope detecting and so on.
• PCI-to-PCI Bridge: transfers the image data from COMSO through PCI DMA channel into PC main memory.
• SH-4: is in charge with real time control for scan operation and safety.
5-6 Section 5-2 - Block Diagrams and Theory
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-4 CPU/Backend Processor
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
Figure 5-5 CPU/Backend Processor
The Back End Processor grabs the data from the FEC, stores it in a main memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain and drives the system RGB monitor.
The Back End Processor grabs the data from the Front End, stores it in a main memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing B mode, M mode, CFM, Doppler processing
BEP Box include ATX smps and UPS battery, ATX type P4 motherboard and P4 CPU. Memory capacity is 512MB minimum. AGP and PCI slots on motherboard contains followings
• AGP video card displays image on monitor. Monitor display resolution is 800 x 600, 75Hz.
There is no Separate AGP present on the BEP2/3. It is integrated on the motherboard of the
BEP2/3
• PCI Slot #1 VIC Card: Video Converter Board for VCR playback and VCR recording and analog video image printing
• PCI Slot #2: Open slot
• PCI Slot #3 PC2IP card
• PCI Slot #4 Sound Card (integrated on the BEP Motherboard in BEP2/3)
• PCI Slot #5 Ethernet Card (integrated on the BEP Motherboard in BEP2/3)
• PCI Slot #6: Open slot for 3D sensor card option (to be introduced in the future)
Storing Devices:
• Hard Disk Drive (HD Drive) (Inside the PC box)
• CD R/W Drive (Available from the front of scanner).
• Optional Magneto Optical Drive (MO Drive) (Optional) (Available from the front of scanner).
Chapter 5 5-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-5 VIC Card
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5-8
Figure 5-6 VIC Board
VIC Card perform video conversion operations and Power on/off control.
• Video Decoder: Video decoder convert S-VHS or composite video analog signal to digital RGB data and send the RGB digital data into BEP main memory on motherboard through PCI bus. And then this video digital data is displayed on console monitor. Video analog signal comes from rear panel.
This video decoder also have IIC bus interface logic.
• VGA to TV Convertor: This device convert the VGA display signal to TV display signal for B/W printer and color printer and VCR recording.
• Shutter Control CPLD: Shutter signals for analog B/W printer and color printer are generated by this
CPLD. And this CPLD is controlled by video decoder via IIC bus.
• Power Control FPGA: This FPGA generates power on/off signal. This device is alive always by live
DC power which comes from ACI assy in AC Power Assy. So this device monitor the status of power on/off switch on the keyboard. If power switch will be pushed once, this device turn on the
LV power supply in AC power assy and after few seconds, turn on the BEP assy.
Section 5-2 - Block Diagrams and Theory
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-6
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Patient I/O (Option)
The optional Patient I/O is mounted at the front of the scanner with its connector panel.
Available inputs:
• PCG
• ECG
• AUX1
• AUX2
• Top Console
The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A), and loudspeakers for stereo sound output
(used during Doppler scanning, inside the Keyboard assy).
5-2-7 Keyboard
Figure 5-7 Keyboard Block Diagram
Keyboard assy provide all of operator interface for scan.Keyboard assy consist of several pieces of main function assembly.
• USB HUB Assy: The USB HUB assy has USB interface for upstream USB port which comes from
BEP. USB HUB assy also has alpha numeric key interface, control functions and USB hub. So the
USB trackball, the USB of main assy.
• MAIN Assy: The Main assy has a USB micom to interface between the main assy and USB hub assy. All function keys’ and encoders’ interface and controls are done by an additional control on the micom chip.
Chapter 5 5-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-2-8
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Monitor
15 inch high resolution RGB monitor with non interlace scan includes a task lamp to light up the A/N key on keyboard assy
Figure 5-8 Monitor
Section 5-3
External I/O on the Rear Panel
The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items, located at the rear side of the scanner.
Examples: InSite, TCP/IP network, Printer, etc.
Section 5-4
Peripherals
Black & White Video Printer (Optional) is installed onboard the scanner. VCR, Color Printer are connected off board through the External I/O (Rear Panel). For Connecting the Peripherals refer to
Peripheral Option Manuals.
5-10 Section 5-3 - External I/O on the Rear Panel
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Section 5-5
Power Diagrams
5-5-1
5-5-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview
The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter board has been included in the AC box.
AC Power
AC Mains
Input.
100VAC,/
115VAC/
230VAC
Power
Switch
&
Noise Filter
Per_ON
Rac_ON
SCL
SDA
5VDD
VCC
GND
Inrush limiter & power relay
Power
Transformer
AC Power
Supply
AC power Cuntrol Circuit
Secondary
AC output control circuit
AC Pwr Front Panel
AC Pwr Rear Panel
AC Pwr Modem
AC Pwr ATX (pc ps)
AC Pwr LVPS
AC Pwr HVPS
AC Pwr CRT(Monitor)
ACI Assembly
Figure 5-9 AC Power Distribution Block Diagram
The mains cord has plugs in one side end. A male plug connects to the mains outlet on site.
The mains voltage is routed to the Main Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the system.
The Main Circuit Breaker is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power.
From the Main Circuit Breaker, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
Chapter 5 5-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-5-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
AC Power
(cont’d)
The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains. Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230 VAC or 115 VAC or 100 VAC.
AC Power is supplied directly to the ATX PS (PC Power supply, located on the PC box) and to the HV unit CRT Monitor and LV unit via ACI PCB.
When the Power switch is ON, this signal is outputted from VIC board to the following devices via
KBD>RPI>VIC> Mother board.
• The signal is sent to PC Box, then sent to ATX PS, so that the ATX PS is switched ON to apply DC power to the PC.
• The signal is sent to ACI PCB so that the SSR is switched ON to apply AC power to the LV unit, HV unit, and CRT monitor.
• The signal is sent to ACI PCB so that the SSR is switched ON to apply AC power to AC outlets of the Rear panel/Front Panel
5-5-3 DC Power (Low Voltage)
AC110V is supplied to the LV unit via AC Box > Transformer > ACI PCB. This is multiplied and rectified then step-downed to Low DC voltage to supply the devices/boards in the scanner.
The LV also support 12VDC for the system cooling fan.
DC Output Capacity:
• +3.3V, 20A
• +5VD, 14A
• +5V, 10A
• -5V, 3A
• +12V, 4A
• -12V, 500mA (Generated on the Back PlaneBoard using DC/DC converter)
5-12 Section 5-5 - Power Diagrams
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-5-4 TX Power/HV Power Supply
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
AC_IN
PFC
PWM1
(HVH)
PWM2
(HVL)
PWM3
(SVH)
DROPPER 1
DROPPER 1
DROPPER 2
DROPPER 2
DROPPER 3
DROPPER 3
+HVH
(0~60V)
- HVH
(0~ - 60V)
+HVL
(0~30V)
- HVL
(0~ - 30V)
+SVH
(80V)
- SVH
(80V)
5-5-4-1
5-5-4-2
5-5-4-3
5-5-4-4
Figure 5-10 HV Unit Block Diagram
Overview
AC110V is supplied to the HV unit via AC Box > Transformer > ACI PCB. This is applied to the PFC, inside the HV unit. The PFC convert AC100V to DC400V, and DC voltage is applied to DC/DC, then to
HVH, HVL, and SHV using dropper. They convert DC voltage to proper voltage to be outputted.
Specifications
DC Output Capacity:
• HVH: +/- 0V to +/- 60V variable, Max. 110W, Max. 2A
• HVL: +/-0V to +/- 30V variable, Max, 70W, 1A
• +SHV: +80V +/- 5%, 80mA
• -SHV: -80V +/- 5%, 80mA
Output Signal to FEC
The following signals are sent to FEC via BACKPLANE board.
• OV (Over Voltage), OC (Over Current) of each power source: HV tests in itself. The result transmits the FEC via BACKPLANE ASSY.
Input Signal from FEC
The following signals are sent to HV unit via FEC > BACKPLANE board.
• +5V, +/- 12V, HV STOP: These signals are sent to PFC to control DC voltage output of HVH, HVL, and -SHV. Normally HVSTOP is ON
• HVH Ref, HVL Ref: These are the digital signals (8 bits) sent to the DAC of HVH or HVL from FEC.
Consequently, The DC Voltage (0 - 60V) is outputted from HV unit.
Chapter 5 5-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Section 5-6
Circuit Boards Descriptions
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The following table lists circuit boards and their respective card cage slot assignments on the mother board of the LOGIQ™ 3 system.
Table 5-2 CIRCUIT BOARD DESCRIPTION
Card Cage
Slot
1
2
3
4
5
Board Name
TXB
RXB
CWD
DBF
FEC
HVPS
ACI
Conn.
RPL
LVPS
RPI
BPB
Description
Transmit Board
Receive Board
Continuous Wave Doppler Board
Digital Beam Former
Front End Controller
High Voltage Power Supply
AC Control Interface
Connector Board
Rear Panel Assy
Low Voltage Power Supply
Rear Panel Interface
Back Plane Board
Note
RPI + RP1 + RP2
5-14 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-1 Front End
5-6-1-1 Connector Board
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
HV Supply
Probe
Connector
128
Relays
128
HV
Mux
48
Transmit/Receive Board
Probe
Connector
EEPROM
128
RELAY
Control
Config
ROM
FPGA
B
U
F
USC Interface (From FEC)
Figure 5-11 Connector Board - 2 Probe Port Type
Figure 5-12 Connector Board = 3 Probe Port Type
Chapter 5 5-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview
Conn. Board contains of 2 phased array probe connectors and provides switchable connection between probes and transmitters/receivers.
The main function of Connector Board is as follows.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2-to-1 or 3-to-1 selectors for two or three probes.
Interface with USC bus (control bus)
Interface with FEC ASSY for IIC bus.
Supply/Cut control and failure detection of supply voltage for Mux circuit in a Probe.
Device: Mechanical Relay
Switch: 128Ch 2:1 selector
Max. Voltage: 140Vp-p
Max. current: 0.5A
Connector Board can support upto 192 elements , for LOGIQ 3 Expert only.
Interface to Probe
• Probe Status detection
-
-
Detects whether or not a probe is connected.(POPEN)
Detects ID code of a connected probe.(PCODE)
• Mux Interface
Transfers control data of Mux to a probe.(CONSYS,CONSTA)
-
-
Enables/Disables control of data.
Detects whether Mux data setting is finished or not.
• Power Supply for Mux
Supply/Cut control:
+5V and +12V on a connector are supplied while a probe is connected to the connector.
+/-SHV are supplied only while a probe is selected.
• Surface temperature
Detects resistance of a thermistor in a probe head as voltage when the probe is selected.(PTEMP) This signal is connected to FEC.
• LED Blinking
The LED in a probe glows when the probe is selected. (Only on Selected probe which have
LED’s)
-
-
IIC bus
Connects signals of IIC bus with a relay when IIC bus access is required.
Selects one of two probes that IIC access with 2-to-1 switch.
Board Rev, Board No., Part No., are stored in EEPROM and sent to FEC through IIC Bus.
5-16 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-1-2 Transmit Board
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CON/RX Board
48
HV
Discharge
HV Supply
16
Transmit Drivers
48
TPG2
16
Transmit Drivers
48
TPG2
16
Transmit Drivers
48
TPG2
EEPROM
IIC Bus
Control And Data bus
Config
ROM
FPGA
B
U
F
Figure 5-13 Transmit Board Block Diagram
Clock
DRV
ECL to TTL
USC Interface (From FEC)
Overview
The TXB Assy (Transmit Board) is designed for LOGIQ™ 3 system transmitter. This Assy has bipolar drivers, transmit pulse generator ASIC and so on.
Key Features
Main Items are
-
* TXIC: FPGA Interface and controller FPGA.
* TPG 2 ASIC: Controller of pulse driver, Mixed signal ASIC.
Bipolar drivers.
Chapter 5 5-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-1-3 CWD Board (Optional)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 5-14
The major function of this board is analog beam forming by acting as a steering beam former and demodulator. It receives analog input from the RXB via the RFC2 board and digital control input from FEC via the BPB.
It gives its digital output to FEC.
5-18 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-1-4 Receive Board
48
CON/TX Board 0
TR Switch
1
TR Switch
Preamp/ VCA
Preamp/ VCA
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
48
DBF Board
Limiter
Limiter
EEPROM
IIC Bus
47
TR Switch Preamp/ VCA
3.6V
Limiter
5
5V
REF GENERATOR
5V Supply
Control Signal from FEC
CONTROL
Figure 5-15 Receive Board
Sub-system receives and amplifies each echo signal. Then, all echo signals are outputted to the DBF
Assy.
The RXB ASSY can amplify the echo signals. So, the echo signals are received by a RXB ASSY under appropriate control. The RXB ASSY are inserted into Nest box, which is composed of BACKPLANE and other boards.
The RXB ASSY have main three blocks: TR Switch, Pre-amp and Gain Control and Mode control block.
The Transmit/Receive Switch protects the receive amplifier from high voltage transmit pulse the RXB
ASSY amplifies the echo signals. The mode control block selects a maximum gain code via dedicated control signals from FEC.
The analog voltage signal provided by Gain Control block gives total amplified gain.
The block diagram above of the RXB ASSY for a received signal is given. Actually, there are 48 echo adaptive channels in the assy.
The Pre-amp block consists of Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) which amplifies the RX Signal by fixed Gain and Time Gain Control Amplifier (TGC).
The Pre-amp block is controlled by totally 4digital signals and an analog signal. In digital, One for input impedance alternative low or high mode, another (3 bits) for choice of maximum gain code.
Chapter 5 5-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-1-5 Digital Beam Former
48
From RX Board
0
AAF & ADC DRV
7
AAF & ADC DRV
ADC
ADC
12
12
Oqcard
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
34
RF data to FEC
Oqcard
47
AAF & ADC DRV
12
ADC
To ADCs (24)
5V
Voltage
References
2
Figure 5-16 DBF Block Diagram
To Oqcard (6)
SRAM
FPGA
B
U
F
USC
BUS
Clock
DRV
ECL to TTL
Overview
The DBF sub-system is the receiving Digital beam former.
The DBF sub-system is delay summing echo signals after pre-amplification and time controlled gain at the RXB ASSY. Then, the DBF sub-system adds the delay sum data and transfers the results to the
FEC sub-system.
The block diagram is shown in the Figure above.
The DBF sub-system consists of delay summing part and its controller part.
Control Part
• Function Outline
-
-
Interfaces with CPU through USC Bus.
Generates receive timing.
-
-
Controls OQCARD's operation.
Controls delay data transfer from SRAM memories to OQCARD’s.
5-20 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• Operation Description
Scan Mode:
This mode is for imaging. The parameters specific to scan line number are sent to OQCARD’s and the start trigger for receiving signals is generated.
Access Mode:
This mode is for accessing SRAM memories and OQCARD’s.
5-6-2
5-6-2-1
Mid Processors
FEC
Figure 5-17 FEC Board
Overview
Key Features
• CHAF:(SPARE)
Three CHAFs have functions of coded excitation decorder and 2nd harmonic filter.
• COMSO:
Has functions of detector, B/M mode edge enhance, Log compression, and dynamic range control.
Chapter 5 5-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• PCI IF:
Converts USC bus in FEC board. The local bus is connected to each block. It transfers B/M mode data to PACO FPGA via the COMSO data bus.
• USC IF:
Has functions of generation to USC bus, generation of TGC signal and test signal for selfdiagnostics, COMSO control, IIC Bus.
• CLK Generator Block:
Generates 40MHz (two phases), and 26.6MHz clock using 160MHz master clock.
• Real Time Controller (RTCL):
The TRIG cyclical Real Time Control is done by SH4 RISC processor. SH4 is a one of MID BUS agent through SH-PCI bridge.
• PCI - PCI Bridge:
It Bridges between Mid bus and host side PCI bus by using i960RP. Mid bus is basically compliant to Compact PCI. Primary side PCI is connected to Host PC through PCI cable and PC2IP which is mounted on PCI slot of PC-motherboard.
• Image Data Transferring:
It receives image data from COMSO, and send them to Host side. Data is buffered when receiving on COMSO data bus. After buffered, data is stored and handled on Local side of i960. And DMA function of i960RP perform data transferring to host PC memory.
• Peripheral Control:
The SH4 or i960RP also performs other functions like safety observation, HV Control and so on
5-22 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-2-2 THI Board (integrated on FEC 2277093-9)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 5-18
THI board gives an improved axial resolution and contrast feature.
THI is implemented using CHAF ASIC.
Chapter 5 5-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-2-3 PC2IP Board
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 5-19
The PC2IP acts a means for communication between FEC and the BEP.
It is implemented using an Intel I960 IC.
5-24 Section 5-6 - Circuit Boards Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-3 CPU/Back End Processor
5-6-3-1 PC BOX
The PC Box contains:
-
-
-
-
-
CPU, Mother Board, AGP Video Card and LAN Board
ATX Power Supply
HDD
CD R/W
ECG (Option)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Part of Motherboard in BEP2/3
Part of Motherboard in BEP2/3
Part of Motherboard in BEP2/3
Figure 5-20 PC Box
Chapter 5 5-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-6-3-2 Rear Panel
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
The Rear Panel Assy interconnects external signals and power with the LOGIQ™ 3 system.
M
ANUAL
Safety
• Rear Panel Fuses
Table 5-3 Rear Panel Fuse Specification
Assembly
Power Voltage Rating
(V)
Peripheral Current
Rating (A)
Rear Panel
100 5.0
Rear Panel
Rear panel
115
230
5.0
3.0
Trip Time
1 hour max. @ 5.4A, 25 degree C
1 hour max. @ 5.4A, 25 degree C
1 hour max. @ 3.5A, 25 degree C
Reset Time
60 seconds
60 seconds
60 seconds
• Electrical Isolation
The rear-panel's Insite (modem) interface is electrically isolated from the system's internal circuit.
The isolator's dielectric strength should be 500VAC RMS or higher within 1 minute (in compliance with IEC60601-1-1).
Printer (Camera) Remote Control Interface
The Rear-panel has two remote control interface terminals for B/W and color printers.
Table 5-4 Camera (Printer) Remote Control Interface Specifications
Color camera (shutter) control
B/W camera (printer) control
Level (V)
H:2.0/L:0.8
H:2.0/L:1.0
Active Polarity
L
L
Retention Time
60 msec
800 msec
Section 5-7
Mechanical Descriptions
5-7-1 Monitor
• Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards
• Swivel: 90° From mean position
5-26 Section 5-7 - Mechanical Descriptions
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Section 5-8
Air Flow Control
5-8-1
5-8-2
5-8-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Air Flow Distribution
The four air flow passes allow the scanner to be cooled down as below.
• Pass A (Bottom right> PC Box > Rear upper left) for PC Box cooling.
• Pass B (Front lower left > Filter > LV unit > Rear lower left) for HV unit cooling.
• Pass C (Bottom left> Scan Box Assy > Rear upper right) for Scan Box Assy cooling.
• Pass D (Bottom left> Filter >Nest Assy> Rear upper right) for Nest Assy cooling.
Filters
The scanner contains one filter located below the Front Bumper Between Two Wheels.
Fans
Fan for Nest Assy
Fan for PC Box
Figure 5-21 Fans
The scanner contains the five fans at the following positions for producing an air flow.
-
-
One fan: On the PC Box for air flow pass A
Four fans: At the top of the NEST Assy for air flow pass D
Chapter 5 5-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Section 5-9
Common Service Platform
5-9-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all PC backend ultrasound and cardiology systems. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Common Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
5-28 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)
5-9-2-1
5-9-2-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Internationalization
The user interfaces provided by the service platform are designed for GE personnel and as such are in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
Service Login
Select the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user to the service login screen.
Figure 5-22 Login Screen for Global Service Interface
5-9-2-3 Access / Security
The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools they are authorized for their use.
NOTE:
Table 5-5 User Level Access
Access Authorization User Level
Operator
Administrator
External Service
Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.
uls uls gogems
NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password listed to the service key.
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.
Chapter 5 5-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-3 Service Home Page
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities.
5-30 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Error Logs Page
From the Error Logs page the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an
Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.
The Filter Error log is not available to customer level analysis.
The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance
Table 5-6 Log Entry Key
Severity
1
2
3
Error Level
Information
Warning
Error
Color Code
Green
Blue
Red
Figure 5-23 Log Viewer/Logs/Log Entries
Chapter 5 5-31
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-4-1 Logs
LOGIQ™ 3 S
The three sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Informatics and Temperature.
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE: Figure 5-23 on page 31 Provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs.
Log table headings for the different logs are as follows:
• System
Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message.
• Infomatics
Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight,
ExamID, Exam Category, ExamCurDate, and ExamStartTime.
• Temperature
Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Upper FEC Sensor; and Lower FEC
Sensor.
5-32 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-4-2 Utilities
The two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log and Plot Page.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 5-24 Utilities Sub-Menus
• Plot Log
Allows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.
• Plot Page
Allows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.
Chapter 5 5-33
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-4-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Search
On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find.
This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word fail.
5-9-4-4
Figure 5-25 Search Category
Exit
The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.
5-34 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 5-26 Exit Log Sub-Menu
Chapter 5 5-35
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-5 Diagnostics
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.
5-9-5-1
5-9-5-2
5-9-5-3
Diagnostics Execution
Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
Diagnostic Reports
Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs.
Proactive Diagnostics
A system of self-monitoring is largely supported with the integration of iLinq. The scheduler, executive, user interfaces, and some of the proactive diagnostic functions are provided by iLinq. Other tasks will need to be provided by the product team.
5-36 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-6 Image Quality
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
5-9-7
Figure 5-27 Image Quality Page
Calibration
The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
Figure 5-28 Calibration Page
Chapter 5 5-37
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-8
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Configuration
The Configuration page is used to setup various configuration files on the system.
The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem.
The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page.
Figure 5-29 Configuration Page
5-38 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-9 Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools.
5-9-10
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Replacement
The Replacement page intended to contain the tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.
Figure 5-30 Part Replacement Page
Chapter 5 5-39
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
5-9-11 PM
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.
Figure 5-31 Planned Maintenance Page
5-40 Section 5-9 - Common Service Platform
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 6-1
Overview
6-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 6
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel.
Table 6-1 Chapter 6 Contents
Section
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
Overview
Regulatory
Power Supply Adjustments
Monitor Adjustment
Description Page Number
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-9
Section 6-2
Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Section 6-3
Power Supply Adjustments
6-3-1
This system contains three power supply modules; HV unit, LV unit, and ATX PS. However, the LV unit only can be adjusted.
1.) Power ON. Wait for about 30 seconds to warm up the console.
2.) For each of the VR’s, connect a DVM to the appropriate place shown.
3.) Verify that the voltages are as shown in the table 6-3 on the test points in the Transmit and
Recieve Board..
Access to Adjustments for LV Power Supply
1.) Remove the left side cover.
2.) Remove the LV unit cover.
3.) Remove the screws, then pull out the LV unit Assy with the cables connected.
Chapter 6 6-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Please ensure that the Voltages at the Test points on the Recieve board and FEC are as per
LVPS
6-2
The LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert will have
3 Probe Ports as seen here
Figure 6-1 LV Power Supply
Specifications given in Table 6-2 . If needed, Please re-adjust the potentiometers located on the LVPS as per the specifications given in Table 6-2 .
Section 6-3 - Power Supply Adjustments
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 6-2 DC Output Specification for LV Unit
VR (Potentiometer on LVPS)
VR1
VR2
VR3
VR4
Specifications
3.3V +/- 34mV
5V +/- 100mVany
5V +/- 100mV
-5 V +/- 100mV
PCB Name
FEC
FEC
RXB
RXB
Test Point
D_3_3V - Figure 6-3
D5V - Figure 6-4
P5VA - Figure 6-5
N5VA - Figure 6-6
Refer to the Figures mentioned in Table 6-2 for the exact location of the test points on the boards.
Refer to Figure 6-7 for the location of the VR potentiometers on the LVPS.
Refer to the Figure 6-2 for instructions on how to vary the voltage.
Rotate the VR in the
Anti-Clockwise Direction to Reduce the
Voltage
Rotate the VR in the
Clockwise Direction to Increase the Voltage.
NOTE:
Figure 6-2 VR Adjustment on the LVPS
The Potentiometers are very sensitive. Please be very careful at the time of adjusting the
VRs as any extreme changes to the voltages will damage the Front End Boards.
Chapter 6 6-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
6-3-1-1 Location of the test points.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
The following figures show the Test points for the various Potentiometers on the LVPS.
M
ANUAL
D_3_3V
(VR1)
FEC
Figure 6-3 Test Point for VR1 - D_3_3V on the FEC
6-4 Section 6-3 - Power Supply Adjustments
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
D5V
(VR2)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
FEC
Figure 6-4 Test Point for VR2 - D5V on the FEC
Chapter 6 6-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
P5VA
(VR3)
Receive Board
6-6
Figure 6-5 Test Point for VR3 - P5VA on the RXB
Section 6-3 - Power Supply Adjustments
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
N5VA
(VR4)
Receive Board
Figure 6-6 Test Point for VR4 - N5VA on the RXB
Chapter 6 6-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
VR1
VR2
VR3
VR4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
6-8
Figure 6-7 Locations of the VR Potentiometers on the LVPS ( As Seen From Top)
Section 6-3 - Power Supply Adjustments
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 6-4
Monitor Adjustment
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
This helps to adjust the settings of the Contrast and the Brightness on the CRT Monitor suitably.
The Monitor Adjustment button is displayed as shown.
Brightness & Contrast
Adjustment Buttons
Figure 6-8 Monitor Adjustment
1.) Press The Toggle Button for contrast & brightness. Confirm that the Contrast (or brightness) indicator is displayed on the monitor. If the brightness is displayed, press the toggle button again.
2.) Press the adjustment button (+/2/>) to increase contrast (or brightness)
3.) Press the Adjustment button (-/2/<) to decrease contrast (or brightness).
The amount of contrast (or brightness) is shown on a slide bar on the screen. Refer the following table for the setting.
Table 6-3 Contrast and Brightness Recommended Setting
Room Condition
Dark room
Dim room
Bright room room for Cardiology
Contrast
Monitor Adjustment
Brightness
50 40
60
70
80
35
30
20
Record the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information withe the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set, the display becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).
After readjusting the monitor’s Contrast and Brightness, readjust all preset and peripheral settings.
The Procedure for the Caliberation of the Monitor is given in section 6-4-1 on page 10 .
Chapter 6 6-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
6-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Re-calibration the Monitor.
1.) Power on the system and boot into the imaging mode.
2.) Press the Utilities button on the front panel and enter the utilities mode as shown in Figure 6-9
Figure 6-9 Utilities Menu
6-10 Section 6-4 - Monitor Adjustment
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3.) Select the Test Patterns Menu as seen shown in the Figure 6-10.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 6-10 Test Pattern Menu
4.) From the Test patterns menu, select the menu White as seen in Figure 6-10.
Chapter 6 6-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5.) Locate the Brightness/Contrast button on the monitor bezel as shown in Figure 6-11.
Brightness/Contrast Control
Figure 6-11 Brightness/Contrast Control
6.) Press and hold the Brightness/Contrast button on the monitor (as shown in Figure 6-11 above) for approximately 3 to 4 seconds.
7.) A menu will appear on the screen.
8.) Press the right arrow 3 times to the RGB icon (COLOR TEMP) and press the Brightness/Contrast button once to select it.
9.) Now press right arrow 2 times to CALIBRATION and press Brightness/Contrast button to select it.
10.)This will begin the Calibration process during which the monitor will cycle through various colors and will end with the message “IT HAS COMPLETED...” which will only display for a short time and then disappear. Wait for this message to appear. During the Calibration Process, do not operate any key or the pointer of the system or the monitor Calibration process will not complete accurately.
This completes the Monitor Calibration of the LOGIQ
TM
3 system.
6-12 Section 6-4 - Monitor Adjustment
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 7-1
Overview
7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Very basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level. However most software tests are required.
7-1-2
NOTE:
Section
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Table 7-1 Contents in Chapter 7
Description
Overview
Gathering Trouble Data
Screen Captures
Diagnostics
Common Diagnostics
Service Notes
Page Number
7-1
7-2
7-4
7-8
7-11
7-12
Diagnostic Procedure Summary
Although Diagnostics can be run in any order, the Bottom-up Confidence-Building Order is outlined in this section:
-
-
-
Provides a framework from which overall diagnostic testability can be determined.
Provides a top-level model that describes the confidence-building aspect of the diagnostics.
Provides a logical step-by-step approach to system check-out and fault isolation.
There are two levels of diagnostic: board-level and system level.
-
-
Board-level diagnostics are intended to test functionality of a single circuit board.
System-level diagnostics are intended to test functionality on more than one circuit board.
Unused system components (board or signals) for each diagnostic test are drawn in gray (ghosted).
In this document, the Host includes all hardware upstream of the PCI cable. The diagnostics in this chapter do NOT test anything upstream of the PCI cable. Therefore, any upstream hardware or software must be functional before running these diagnostics.
Chapter 7 7-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 7-2
Gathering Trouble Data
7-2-1
7-2-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis.
There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.
Collect Vital System Information
The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
Product Name = LOGIQ™ 3 Expert / PRO / B-W
7-2
From the Utility>System>About screen:
Applications Software
-
-
-
-
Software Version
Software Part Number
System Image Software
Image Part Number
Image Date
Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-2-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Collect a Trouble Image with Logs
If the system should malfunction, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture of the image monitor, system presets and the following logs:
-
-
-
-
-
Keyboard Shadow Log
Error Logs
Crash Log
Power Supply
Temperature
NOTE:
NOTE:
Formate CD before using ‘ALT-D’
Power Supply are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 3.
This Alt-D function is available at all times.
NOTE:
Figure 7-1 ALT-D Dialog Box
When Alt-D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for:
-
-
A place to enter a description of the problem
A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW or to the Export directory D: drive
(for remote viewing through InSite).
You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device if it is to be different than the default
Export directory on the hard drive. Choose the H: drive which is the MOD or the CD-RW.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Chapter 7 7-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 7-3
Screen Captures
7-3-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.
The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps:
1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button.
2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.
3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD or CD-R.
4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings.
Check and Record the P4 Key Function
Check the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings.
1.) Select Utility from the keyboard.
2.) Select Connect from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Button tab on the Connect screen.
4.) In the PhysicalPrintButtons field, select Print4.
The Connect->Button Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-2 on page 4 .
7-4
Figure 7-2 Buttons Set Up Screen
P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-2 , proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings.
Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-3-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Check and Record the P4 Key Function
(cont’d)
5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays the following information:
* Name: user defined during service configuration
* Type: the type of service
* Destination Device: the device for which the service was configured
* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.
7-3-2 Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture
If the P4 Key is not set to screen capture:
1.) While on the Connect screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section.
2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out.
3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary
Capture and No Image Compression.
4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard).
Chapter 7 7-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-3-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Capturing a Screen
The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.
2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display.
7-6
Clipboard
Thumbnails
Menu
Figure 7-3 Select Image to Capture
3.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R.
4.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.
Save As
Figure 7-4 Menu > Save As
Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-3-3 Capturing a Screen
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-3-4
NOTE:
Figure 7-5 Save Dialog Box
5.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.
Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality
If the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in section 7-3-1 on page 4 . Refer to Figure 7-2 .
1.) Select Utility from the NTPUI.
2.) Select Connect from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Button tab on the Connect screen.
4.) In the PhysicalprintButtons field, select Print4.
5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5 , Section 7-3-1 . The destinations list displays the following information:
* Name: user defined during service configuration
* Type: the type of service
* Destination Device: the device for which the service was configured
* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
Only output services can be associated to the print keys.
6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in step
6 , Section 7-3-1 .
Chapter 7 7-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 7-4
Diagnostics
7-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the overall service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Common Diagnostics and
LOGIQ
TM
3 Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests.
Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.
Serviceability
1.) -Latest Service Platform Integrated for R4xx base.
2.) -Boot-up into Simulation mode w/o FEC
3.) -Latest WinXP with iLinq and InSite
4.) -Improved Documentation of PM Procedure
5.) -Improved Service Diag and Operator Interface
6.) -Total ALT+D (log file) size < 5MB
7.) -No new Service tool.
8.) -PC Doctor - compatible with XP
9.) -System Network Information
10.)-Customer notification (indication that service is logged to system - disruptive mode)
11.)-Service presets related to iLinq introduced.
12.)-Enter Service Menu using Utility/Service. ‘Wrench’ disabled.
7-8 Section 7-4 - Diagnostics
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 7-6 User Acquisition Diagnostics
Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems.
When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown in Figure 7-7 on page 10 .
1.) Instructions Frame
Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts, the frame displays the “current” status of all test results.
The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Execute Button
-
-
-
This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
Execute - to start the diagnostic
Abort - to stop a diagnostic
Chapter 7 7-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-10
Figure 7-7 Diagnostic Selected
4.) Loop Count
This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
5.) Progress Indicator
Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
-
-
Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to indicate completion status.
Code Status Fail = Red
-
-
-
Code Status Pass = Green
Code Status Executing = Yellow
Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).
Section 7-4 - Diagnostics
7-5-2-1
7-5-2-2
7-5-2-3
7-5-2-4
7-5-2-5
7-5-2-6
7-5-2-7
7-5-2-8
7-5-2-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 7-5
Common Diagnostics
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-5-1 Utilities
Table 7-2 Utilities Mode
Items
Disruptive
System Shut Down
Descriptions
Enable: The disruptive diagnostic mode is ON and the other PC connected to the scanner via network can operate the scanner remotely for troubleshooting.
N/A
7-5-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests)
The non-interactive or interactive PC Diagnostic tests are automatically executed only by clicking the following menu. The test log, displayed at the status frame, reports all diagnostic test results, the testing time, and testing date.
CPU Tests
Hard Drive Tests
Memory Tests
CD-ROM Drive Tests
Video Test
USB Test
PCI Board Configuration Test
Keyboard Test
Audio Test
Chapter 7 7-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 7-6
Service Notes
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-12
Table 7-3 Service Notes
Service Note Number
SN-70411
SN-73074
SN-73073
SN-73064
SN-73061
SN-73058
SN-73056
SN-73055
SN-73053
SN-73051
SN-73050
SN -73108
SN-73104
SN-73102
SN -73100
SN -73098
SN -73097
SN -73095
SN-73092
SN-73090
SN-73084
SN-73082
SN-73081
SN-73080
SN-73078
SN-73077
SN-73075
Description
Daylight Saving Time(DST)- New Dates
DO NOT USE LOGIQ 3 MONITOR FRU P/N:
2319551-7
LOGIQ 3 FRU New Collector Parts
LOGIQ 3 FMI 73069 Closure
Refer to 7-6-1
Refer to 7-6-2
LOGIQ 3 FMI 73074 Closure
LOGIQ 3 Debrief Guidelines
Refer to 7-6-3
Refer to 7-6-4
Refer to
Refer to
7-6-5
7-6-6
LOGIQ 3 FMI 73060 OFFICIALLY CLOSED Refer to 7-6-7
LOGIQ 3 BT05 New FRUs and compatibility matrix Refer to 7-6-8
Reference Page
Preventive Maintenance for LOGIQ3 Monitor
Additional System Serial Sticker Label Location
Refer to 7-6-9
Refer to 7-6-10
Keyboard Knobs
Introduction Of FMI 73068/70/71
Refer to
Refer to
7-6-11
7-6-12
Logiq 3 Win XP Systems with S/W R.4.0.0 -
Inclusion of Base and Application Software CDs inside the System
Refer to 7-6-13
LOGIQ™ 3 - Introduction of Improved Keyboard
Assembly
Refer to 7-6-14
BIOS Settings
PC2IP Driver installation on BEP 2 System with
PC2IP II board
Introduction of New Receive Board
Introduction of FMI 73066-Monitor MCU
Replacement and
Brightness HV adjustment
Refer to
Refer to 7-6-16
Refer to 7-6-17
Refer to
7-6-15
7-6-18
China power cord
CWD OPtion kit usage fr L3
Refer to 7-6-19
Refer to 7-6-20
Replacement Of Logiq 3 Hardware FRU
Various Boards Used On the Logiq 3
Various Boards Used On the Logiq 3
Intermittent Hang Issues Related to the FEC
Backup and Restore Process in Logiq 3
Monitor Signal Issues
Refer to
Refer to
Refer to
Refer to
Refer to
Refer to
7-6-21
7-6-22
7-6-23
7-6-24
7-6-25
7-6-26
Profer way to enter Maintenance mode on Logiq 3 Refer to 7-6-27
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 7-3 Service Notes
Service Note Number
SN-73049
SN-73048
Description
Hard ware ID Generation on the ACI Board
Preset Restore
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
Refer to 7-6-28
Refer to 7-6-29
Reference Page
M
ANUAL
Chapter 7 7-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-1 SN-70411:Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates
PROBLEM:
Issue 1:
DST start and end dates have changed in some countries.
Issue 2:
The automatic Daylight Saving Time feature in Microsoft Windows products may no longer run on thecorrect date, causing the system’s time to be incorrect.
CAUSE:
Some countries have changed their start and end dates for DST.
SOLUTION:
Access Microsoft website http://support.microsoft.com/kb/928388 to determine if the system’s location site is affected.
Issue 1:
Adjust the system time manually at the start of DST and again at the conclusion.
Issue 2:
If the system relies on the automatic DST feature in Microsoft Windows, turn off the feature and then set the correct system time. Adjust the system time manually at the start of DST and again at the conclusion of DST.
Image Vault only: FMI 77203 for Image Vault 4.2 will be released in April. The upgrade involved with this FMI installs a Microsoft patch to address ongoing Daylight Saving Time changes. After the FMI is applied, the Image Vault will automatically update the system time on the correct date. Therefore, in
November (and ongoing DST time periods), there will be no need to manually adjust the system time.
NOTE: For all products, whenever you install or reinstall application software, or perform a complete or partial base image load, confirm that the date and time are set correctly and that the Windows automatic DST feature is off, if applicable.
7-14 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
F
OR ALL
LOGIQ 3
PRODUCTS
,
To turn off the automatic DST feature and set the system time:
1.) Press Utility and then select System -> General.
2.) Select Date/Time.
3.) On the Date and Time Properties screen, select the Time Zone tab.
4.) Uncheck the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes checkbox, and select
Apply.
5.) Select the Date & Time tab.
6.) Set the proper time for the system’s location and select OK.
7.) On the System screen, select Save.
T
O CHECK OR SET THE SYSTEM TIME
:
1.) Press Utility and then select System -> General.
2.) Select Date/Time.
3.) On the Date and Time Properties screen, select the Date & Time tab.
4.) Set the proper time for the system’s location and select OK.
5.) On the System screen, select Save.
Chapter 7 7-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
SN 73108: DO NOT USE LOGIQ 3 MONITOR FRU P/N: 2319551-7
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 FRU Monitor P/N: 2391551-7.
PROBLEM:
Potential Monitor Failure issue if FRU P/N: 2391551-7 is used.
Failure Mode: No Display with a smoke from the rear side due to HOT failure.
SOLUTION:
Order new monitor FRU P/N: 5308521 from GPO.
NOTE: GPO STOCK OF MONITOR FRU P/N: 2319551-7 is NIL.
7-16 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-3 SN 73104:LOGIQ 3 FRU New Collector Parts
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ 3 Systems
PROBLEM:
LOGIQ 3 FRU new collector parts are introduced.
SOLUTION:
New collector part numbers are as follows:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NEW FRU P/N:
5308521
5310200
5309930
5309925
5142625
5318665
2319490-3
5248396
Description
L3 Monitor FRU Asm
Front Cover 3PP for L3 with labels
Moniter Side cover right for L3 with label
Monitor Top Cover for L3 with label
3 Probe Port EMI Cover Assembly with
Copper Finger
Logiq 3 FRU Transformer Assembly
ACI -AC Control Board Assembly -
Loqiq3
Logiq 3 Power cord - EU type
OLD FRU P/N:
2319551-7
5116278
2320766
2320762
--------
2406958
2319490-2
2342033
Remark
Packaging and Regulatory label added with the Monitor
Regulatory label added
Regulatory label added
Regulatory label added
New Part
VA rating rationalized
In rush current improved
With molded connector
1. Place an order for required parts on GPO using the new collector part numbers.
2. For the parts accompanied with a regulatory label, ensure that the regulatory labels are pasted on the new part used on the system.
Chapter 7 7-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-4 SN 73102: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73069 Closure
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 Systems which need FMI 73069 as per the effectivity mentioned in the FMI Instructions and are Un-located as on date and not upgraded. Systems coded as "5" in GIB are listed below. This Service
Note is applicable only to system serial numbers mentioned below.
System Serial Number
3495WS9
17261WS9
25102WS5
2878WS7
2905WS8
4261WS4
4276WS2
15215WS7
15266WS0
15275WS1
17260WS1
17697WS4
System Serial Number
17750WS1
18604WS9
18687WS4
18754WS2
23067WS2
23283WS5
24308WS9
24617WS3
24897WS1
25103WS3
25109WS0
25118WS1
PROBLEM:
FMI 73069 is officially closed.
SOLUTION:
Order the Spares as per the Late Request Plan mentioned below and download the FMI 73069
Instructions from Common Documentation Library for reference.
Late Request Plan:
1. Refer to Table 7-9 on page 24 for spare parts list to be ordered from GPO.
Part No.
5137225
Part Description
POWER CORD - CHINESE 230V
WITH CCC MARK
Qty/System
1
Table 7-4 List of Spare Parts to be ordered from GPO
2. Refer to Table 7-5 on page 18 for parts to be ordered from the make centre directly.
Part No.
N/A
5149670
Part Description
Power Cord Cable Clamp
SFDA label
Qty/System
1
4
Table 7-5 List of Spare Parts to be ordered from Make Centre
7-18 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-5 SN 73100: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73074 Closure
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 Expert Systems which need FMI 73074 as per the effectivity mentioned in the FMI Instructions
P/N: 5240919 Rev1 and are not upgraded yet.
PROBLEM:
FMI 73074 is officially closed.
SOLUTION:
1. Order the Spares as per the Late Request Plan mentioned below.
Late Request Plan:
1. Refer to Table 7-9 on page 24 for spare parts list.
Table 7-6 List of Spare Parts
Part No.
Part Description
5133116-4 Logiq 3 Expert BT05 Application Software For R4.2.0.
Chapter 7 7-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-6 SN 73098: LOGIQ 3 Debrief Guidelines
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 Systems, all versions.
PROBLEM:
Current Service Comments DO NOT meet FDA guidelines for objective evidence of work and testing performed due to inconsistent Service Debrief Comments.
SOLUTION:
Clarify the scripts to debrief a Service Dispatch using your pole’s dispatch tool. This Service Note also specifies the Functional Checks to be performed for each FRU replacement and Service Work performed.
PROCEDURE:
Use this script in the Service Comments when debriefing a Service Dispatch.
For a replaced FRU, use the following debrief script:
LOGIQ 3 Proprietary Service Manual 5122544-100, Section [fill in appropriate section, per the table below]. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
And, if testing leakage current, use the following debrief script:
LOGIQ 3 Proprietary Service Manual 5122544-100, Section [fill in appropriate section, per the table below]. Leakage Current measured at ________ [record value] and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
NOTE: For example, if you’ve replaced the BEP ASSY (FRU No.700) of LOGIQ 3, you would perform functional tests found in these sections of the LOGIQ 3 Proprietary Service Manual 5122544-100: Section 4-4-1,
4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, and 4-4-6; and run the diagnostic in section 7-5-2. In your debrief you would state:"LOGIQ 3 Proprietary Service Manual 5122544-100, Section 8-2-8. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use."
For a Service Call with no FRU replaced, use the following debrief script:
See Basic Functional Checks in Service Note 73098. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
The following table lists the required Functional Tests, based upon the FRU being replaced. The sections are based on the Service Manual, Direction 5122544-100 Rev 2. Future Proprietary Service
Manual revisions may have additional sections, so be sure to check the sectioncontents as well as the section number.
7-20 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 7-7 Functional Test Matrix of LOGIQ 3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section
8-2-1
8-2-2 ~ 8-2-5
8-2-6
8-2-7
8-3-1
8-3-2
8-3-3
8-3-4
8-3-5
8-3-6
8-3-7
FRU No.
100
101~104
105
106
200
201
202
203
204
205
505
601 ~ 605,
608, 609
606
Description
Monitor Assy
Monitor Covers
Monitor Switch Assy
Task Lamp
Keyboard Assy
Probe Holder
Speaker Pair
Keyboard TGC Assy
HUB PCB Assy
A/N Keyboard Assy
Keyboard Trackball Assy
8-3-8
8-3-9
206
207
8-3-10 208
8-4-1 ~ 8-4-3,
8-4-8 ~ 8-4-11,
8-4-13
8-4-4 ~ 8-4-7,
8-4-12
300 ~ 302,
306 ~ 306,
308
303, 311 ~
312, 307
8-4-14 ~ 4-4-19
Keyboard Freezekey Assy
Power switch and Encoder
PCB Assy
Keyboard Power cable
Covers
Bumpers
EMI Covers
8-4-20
8-4-21 400
8-4-22 ~ 8-4-23 401 ~ 402
VGP Tray
Handle Rod
Front Casotr/ Rear Castor
Air Filter 8-4-24
8-4-25
403
404 Card Cage Fan Assy
8-5-1 ~ 8-5-4
8-5-5
8-5-6
8-6-1
8-6-2 ~ 8-6-3
8-6-5
8-6-6
8-6-7
8-6-8
500 ~ 503
504
700
701
702
703
Rear Panel
Front Panel
Rear Panel Fuse
PCB Boards
Connector Board assy
BEP Assy
Hard Disk Drive
Compact Disk Read Write
BEP Power supply
Diagnostics Leakage Current
7-5-3-2 10-7-4, 10-7-5
7-5-3-2
7-5-3-1
Functional Tests
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1
7-5-3-2
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
7-6-2
7-6-2
7-5-2-1
7-5-2-2
7-5-2-4
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-4, 10-7-5
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
Chapter 7 7-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section
8-6-9
8-6-10
8-7-1
8-7-2
8-7-3
8-7-4
8-7-5
8-7-7
8-8 ~ 8-12
9-14
9-14
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-13
FRU No.
704
706
800
801
802
803
804
805
1100~1103
1104~1116
1107~1118
1200
1316
1317
1318
1000~1011
Description
PCVIC
PC2IP
Transformer Assy
LVPS
ACI Board
Fuse
Circuit Breaker
Noise Filter
Base/Application Software
Loading
VCR
Diagnostics Leakage Current
7-6-2
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-4, 10-7-5
Functional Tests
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7,
4-5
4-6
10-7-4, 10-7-5
Printer
USB 2.0 Flash Memory
Cables Set
10-7-4, 10-7-5
4-6
4-6
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
ECG 10-7-6, 10-7-7, 10-7-8
THI Board
Additional Probe Port
Foot Switch
Probes
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-9
10-7-4, 10-7-5
10-7-9
4-3-1, 4-4-1, 4-4-2, 4-4-3, 4-4-4, 4-4-5, 4-4-6,
4-4-7
4-7-1
4 -6
4-7-1
7-22 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 7-8 Test Key of LOGIQ 3
Section (Test Key)
4-3-1
4 -6
4-7-1
7-5-2
7-5-3-1
7-5-3-2
7-6-2
10-7-4
10-7-5
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
4--5
10-7-6
10-7-7
10-7-8
10-7-9
Test Description
Power On/Boot Up
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Controls
Color Flow Mode Checks
Doppler Mode Checks
Measurement and Multi Image Checks
Basic Measurements
Software Configuration Checks
Peripheral Checks
Probe/Connectors Check
PC Diagnostics (Non- Ineractive Tests)
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) : Keyboard Tests
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) : Audio/Monitor Tests
FRU Tests
Grounding Continuity
Chassis Leakage Current Test
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test
Probe Leakage Current test
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 7 7-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-7 SN 73097: LOGIQ 3 FMI 73060 OFFICIALLY CLOSED
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 Systems which need FMI 73060 as per the effectivity mentioned in the FMI Instructions and are Un-located as on date and hence not upgraded.
PROBLEM:
FMI 73060 is officially closed.
SOLUTION:
1. Identification of BEP.
2. Order the Spares as per the Late Request Plan mentioned below.
If the system has BEP 1, then order and install the spare parts mentioned in Table 7-9 on page 24 .
If the system has BEP 2, then order and install the spares mentioned in Table 7-10 on page 24
Late Request Plan:
1. For systems with BEP 1:
Table 7-9 Spare Parts for BEP 1 systems
Part No.
Part Description
5220185 BEP4
5137896-2 FEC2
2319549-3 Keyboard Assy
5193870 R412 PRO Base Software
5140654-4 R412 PRO Appln Software
2. For systems with BEP 2:
Table 7-10 Spare Parts for BEP 2 systems
Part No.
2393280
5137896-2
2319549-3
5167387
2381159
5120163-2
5140654-4
Part Description
PCVIC
FEC 2
Keyboard Assy
IDE Cable
CD Rom Drive
R412 PRO Base Software
R412 PRO Appln Software
7-24 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-8 SN 73095: LOGIQ 3 BT05 New FRUs and compatibility matrix
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ 3 Systems with software version R4.x.x.
Note:
Also applicabe to LOGIQ 3 Systems with software version R2.x.x but they have to be upgraded to
R4.x.x and the presets have to be re-set accordingly before using the FRUs mentioned below.
Refer Applicability Matrix below.
PROBLEM:
The new FRU’s are introduced.
SOLUTION:
The FRU part numbers are as follows:
Software:
Part Description Part Number
* R4.2.0 Expert Application Software 5133116-4
* R4.1.2 PRO Application software
* R4.1.2 B-W Application software
5140654-4
5140661-3
* BEP4 R4 Base Software 5193870
* BEP3 R4 Base Software 5120166-3
* BEP2 R4 Base Softwaare 5120163-2
Hardware:
Part Description
BEP 4
FEC2
Part Number
5220185
5137896-2
PC2IP3
Hard Disk
5220187
5237487
Emblem Set 5224149
Logiq 3 Monitor Assembly 2319551-7
1. Place an order for required parts at GPO and procure the FRUs.
Chapter 7 7-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
COMPATIBILITY MATIX:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-26 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-9 Sn 73092: Preventive Maintenance Of LOGIQ 3 Monitor
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ 3 Systems beginning with serial number 28365WS5 and higher.
PROBLEM:
Color Tinge issue found on the LOGIQ 3 Monitor. The color tinge (reddish, greenish, or bluish) may be seen across the entire screen or in some regions of the screen.
CAUSE:
Figure 7-8 Color tinge Issue in LOGIQ 3 Monitor
Polarization of Monitor Magnetic field due to external Magnetic field effect.
Chapter 7 7-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
SOLUTION:
Degaussing and Calibration of the monitor in "Factory settings mode" resolves the issue mentioned in the "PROBLEM" section. Follow the below process to "Degauss and Calibrate" the monitor as part of the Preventive Maintenance(or as part of service corrective action).
Step:1.)Power on the Logiq 3 system. Wait for the system to boot to the scan screen.
Step:2.)Press "Utility" Button.
Step:3.)Select "TestPatterns" tab.
A
Figure 7-9 TestPatterns Tab Selection
A- Test Patterns Tab
7-28 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step:4.)Move the track ball pointer over the left hand column of tabs and select "White" test pattern button. Slowly move the trackball pointer away from the "White" test pattern button so as to not accidently select another test pattern, and move the pointer off the screen completely so the pointer is not visible.
B
Figure 7-10 WhitePatterns Selection
B- White button
Chapter 7 7-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step:5.)On the Monitor front please find 3 keys shown in Fig7-50. Press "2" key shown in fig
7-50, which is the menu key, and keep pressing it for 9 seconds to display factory settings on the screen.
7-30
1 2 3
Figure 7-11 Factory Settings Menu Selection
1-Left Key 2-Menu Key 3-Right Key
NOTE:
1
Figure 7-12 FACTORY Settings Windows
1- Factory Settings window
Please hold the "2- Menu Key" as shown in Figure 7-50 to display Factory settings window[DARK BLUE WINDOW] as shown in Figure 7-51 on the screen.
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step:6.)Select "DEGAUSS" from "Factory Settings Window" by using Left/Right Menu keys and then press "2-Menu Key" to start "DEGAUSS" operation.
1
Figure 7-13 Settings Windows
1- DEGAUSS Item
Step:7.)Repeat step 5 to display "Factory Settings window".
Step:8.)Select "RGB" by using Left/Right keys.
Step:9.) Press "Menu Key" to display "RGB Menu".
Step:10.)Select "CALIBRATION" by using Left/Right Menu keys.
Step:11.) Press "Menu Key" to start "calibration" process.
1
2
Figure 7-14 Settings Windows
1- RGB Item 2- CALIBRATION Item
Chapter 7 7-31
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Step:12.)Calibration process takes few minutes. Please wait without activating the system or keyboard.
Figure 7-15 Settings Windows
Step:13.) Repeat "Step 5" to display "FACTORY SETTINGS Window". Select "RECALL" by using "Left/Right Menu Key" and then press "Menu key" to start "Recall" operation.
7-32
Figure 7-16 Settings Windows
1- RECALL Item
Step:14.)Reboot the system.
Step:15.)Check whether the color tinge issue is resolved. If not contact OLC for further help to resolve the issue.
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-10 Sn:73090 Location Of the Logiq 3 System Additional Label with Serial Number information
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ3 systems having Serial No.42402WS8 or above.
PROBLEM:
System Serial Number Label is not found on the transformer. Refer below figure for the location of the system serial number label on transformer.
A
Figure 7-17 System Serial Number Location On Transformer
A.) System Serial Number Label Location on transformer
CAUSE:
The System Serial Number sticker is not legible due to transit damage or due to replacement of the transformer.
SOLUTION:
If the issue mentioned in the PROBLEM Section is observed, Follow the below process to find additional system serial number sticker:
1.) Remove Right Cover.
2.) Remove Left Cover.
3.) Remove Rear Cover.
4.) Remove Front Bumper.
5.) Remove Front Cover.
6.) Remove Top Cover.
Chapter 7 7-33
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7.) It is possible now to see the serial number sticker on the chassis. Please find the serial number sticker on top of the chassis.
1
Figure 7-18 Additional serial Number Sticker Location On The Chassis
1. System Serial Number Sticker Location on top of the chassis
NOTE:
8.) Replace all the covers in the order of reversal.
Please refer Service Manual(5122546) for Removal and Replacement of the covers.
7-34 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-11 Sn73084-Keyboard Knobs
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ 3 Systems with loose or broken Keyboard knobs.
PROBLEM:
Plastic knobs on LOGIQ 3 System keyboard break or become loose in fitting.
SOLUTION:
Use Appropriate Knobs to replace the Knobs which are found defective on the keyboard.
PROCEDURE:
The Knobs are available as Part of the kit(Part Number
:
5155334), Please Order the Part ( 5155334) and Replace appropriate defective Knob.
This kit consists three types of knobs:
1.) Large size plastic knobs used for Imaging Modes and Gain control
2.) Medium size plastic knob used for 'Depth' function
3.) Small size plastic knob used for NTPUI functions, Body pattern, Zoom and Speaker functions
Chapter 7 7-35
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-12
Sn 73082: Introduction of FMI 73068,FMI 73070, FMI 73071
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ™ 3 systems with S/W 2.2.X and having the issues noted in the PROBLEM section.
PROBLEM:
1.) Failure of Export and/or Move function while copying/moving patient data on to a CD.
2.) Spanish Report Translation errors - appearing in Portuguese & English.
3.) Windows Network vulnerability: MSO5-011, MSO5-019, MSO5-043, MS05-051.
4.) 10 Image Report Template not getting printed in the correct format.
SOLUTION:
1.) The issues mentioned in PROBLEM section are resolved by upgrading the LOGIQ™ 3 system with
S/W R2.2.X to R4.0.X by using FMI 73068 or FMI 73070.
Refer table 1-1 to order appropriate FMI kit.
System Type
LOGIQ™ 3 systems(S/W 2.2.X) with BEP2 or BEP3
Serial Number BEP Identification Required FMI FMI Kit to Order
Above 3055WS1
Not Required FMI 73068
Kit Part Number:
5162505
LOGIQ™ 3 systems(S/W 2.2.X) with BEP2 or BEP3.
Below 3055WS1
Refer Step 3 FMI 73068
Kit Part Number:
5162505
LOGIQ™ 3 systems(S/W 2.2.X) with BEP1.
Below 3055WS1
Kit Part Number:
5167186
Table 7-1 Order Appropriate FMI Kit
NOTE:
2.) If the customer requires prior Patients’ data and Images be retained on the hard drive after the upgrade, the FE may order FMI 73071 Kit(Part Number: 5184450). FMI 73071 Kit consists of USB
Hard disk as a tool to support the execution of FMI 73068 or FMI 73070.
USB HDD can not be used with R2xx software (not supported).
-
-
The system should be first upgraded to R4.0.X (C: partition only).
Only in the event of "Unable to create new patient" after the upgrade, the USB HDD is needed to backup patient data. The Ez Backup, Ez Backup with Move or the Export functions can be used.
-
-
After the data is backed up, a full base system s/w reload ( re-ghost) should be performed.
For more information, please follow FMI instructions(Part Number: 5162506).
The USB HARD DRIVE is provided to the field as a tool, and it shouldn't be left at the customer site.
The Imaging presets for the 4.0.X version of software are optimized for better Image Quality.
The existing 2.2.X Imaging presets are not compatible with the 4.0.X version of software that is installed in the system as part of this FMI. For any specific customer requirement for preset optimization, seek support from Application specialist.
7-36 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3.) Identification of LOGIQ™ 3 BEP (Back End Processor) at the site:
Power “ON” the system.
Press “Utility”->Click on “System”->Click on “About”, the following screen appears on the screen.
This indicates that
Logiq 3 system
has BEP2
-
Figure 7-19 About Screen in LOGIQ™ 3 S/W2.2.X
Identify the BEP Type by using the below Table and order appropriate FMI Kit (By Table 1-1).
Image Part Number
2356514-X
2378390-X
5124775-X
BEP Type
BEP1
BEP2
BEP3
The Field Service Engineer(executing the FMI 73068 or FMI 73070) is strictly advised to order the FMI
73071 Kit ONLY ONCE.The Same FMI 73071 Kit needs to be used for executing the FMI 73068 or FMI
73070 subsequently at other sites.
4.) Execute the FMI 73068 or FMI 73070:
Refer FMI Instructions (Part Number: 5162506) for FMI 73068 or FMI 73070 execution.
Chapter 7 7-37
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-13 Sn73081-Logiq 3 Win XP Systems with S/W R.4.x.x - Inclusion of Base and
Application Software CDs inside the System
APPLIES TO:
Logiq 3 Win XP Systems with S/W R 4.0.0 (Logiq 3 Expert/Logiq 3 Pro/Logiq 3 B-W).
PROBLEM:
Missing software CDs with the Logiq 3 System during Installation or during repairs.
SOLUTION:
Starting from Logiq 3 BT05 System S.No.33314WS6 , the Base and Application software CDs are enclosed in a CD pouch attached to the keyboard back cover under the monitor.
PROCEDURE:
1.) Remove two caps (a,b) .Remove two screws (1,2) using "-" Stub B screw driver or a Coin.Lift the Keyboard rear cover up and pull backwords to remove, Refer the figures below(from
Figure 1 to figure 4).
2.) Find the Base and Application CDs inside the CD pouch attached in the Keyboard back cover.Use the Software CDs for loading the relevant software.
3.)
After completing the s/w re-load, the CDs should be put back into the pouch(Refer
Figure 5)
and close the Keyboard back cover.(Refer Figure 6).
7-38 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-14 Sn73080-LOGIQ™ 3 - Introduction of Improved Keyboard Assembly
APPLIES TO :
LOGIQ™ 3 Systems having the Problems Mentioned below.
PROBLEM:
Doppler Spectrum break or/ and Doppler audio break due to keyboard malfunctioning in PWD Mode, without user intervention(without the user changing any controls like PRF, TGC, Depth or moving the trackball).
CAUSE:
Intermittent TGC output due to improper contact between U2 IC and its socket on the keyboard PWA.
SOLUTION:
Replace the Existing Keyboard assembly with the new FRU Keyboard(Part Number:2319549-3).
Chapter 7 7-39
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-15 Sn73078- BIOS Settings
APPLIES TO:
LOGIQ 3 Systems with the Problems Mentioned in the PROBLEM Section of this Service Note.
PROBLEM:
Problems observed in Logiq 3 systems mentioned below:
1.) System Performance Slowdown
2.) Blue screen during system operation
3.) Slow Transition time
4.) Slow Bootup/Booting stops.
5.) USB A Drive appear in F3 Menu even when no USB Device is connected.
SOLUTION:
1. Ensuring that the Bios Settings are correct.
Refer to the Table below for Procedure to ensure that the BIOS settings are correct.
Table 7-2 Procedure to ensure BIOS settings
System Type Change the Bios Settings
LOGIQ 3 System(With S/W Ver 2.X.X)
Refer
section 7-6-15-1 on page 41
LOGIQ 3 BT’05 System
(With S/W Ver 4.X.X)
Refer
section 7-6-15-2 on page 44
7-40 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
PROCEDURE:
7-6-15-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
BIOS settings for Logiq 3 Systems (with S/W version 2.X.X ) are as follows:
1.) During Boot Up, Press F2 to enter SetUp Screen.
2.) Enter the Password as “dhruva”
3.) Under “Exit”.
4.) Enter “Boot” tab, Under “Boot Disk Priority”,select CD RW as the First Boot device as in Figure 7-20 on page 41 and the Hard disk as the Second Boot Device
Figure 7-20 1 st Boot Device CD R/W
5.) Press ESC
Chapter 7 7-41
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
6.) Under “Advanced” --> ”Chipset Configuration” tab, Go To ISA Enable bit . Press Enter and Select “Enabled”. as in Figure 7-21 on page 42
Figure 7-21 Enable ISA bit
Select ISA bit Enabled
7.) Press ‘ESC”
7-42 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8.) Under “Advanced” --> ”Diskette Configuration” tab, Go To Diskette Controller. Press
Enter and Select “Disabled”. as in Figure 7-22 on page 43
Figure 7-22 Disable Diskette Controller
9.) Press ‘ESC”
10.)Under “Advanced” --> ”USB Configuration” tab, go to "High-Speed USB" and set it to
Disabled .
11.)Press ESC
12.)Press “F10”.
13.)Popup Screen appears on the screen.
Chapter 7 7-43
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
14.)Click on “OK” to Save all the changes and exit as per Figure 7-23 on page 44
Figure 7-23 Save changes before Exiting BIOS
15.)Reboot the System..
7-6-15-2 BIOS settings for Logiq 3 BT’05 Systems (with S/W version 4.X,X) are as follows:
1.) During Boot Up, Press F2 to enter SetUp Screen.
2.) Enter the Password as “dhruva”
3.) Under “Exit”,go to the “Load Optimal Default Parameters” and press “Enter” Ref.
Figure 7-24 on page 45
7-44 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4.) pop up screen appears on the screen ,Click on OK.
Figure 7-24 Load Optimal Default Settings
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5.) Press ESC
6.) Enter “Boot” tab, Under “Boot Disk Priority”,select CD RW as the First Boot device as in Figure 7-25 on page 45 and the Hard disk as the Second Boot Device
Figure 7-25 1 st Boot Device CD R/W
7.) Press ESC
Chapter 7 7-45
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8.) Under “Advanced” --> ”Chipset Configuration” tab, Go To ISA Enable bit . Press Enter and Select “Disabled”. as in Figure 7-26 on page 46
Figure 7-26 Disable ISA bit
9.) Press ‘ESC”
7-46 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10.)Under “Advanced” --> ”Diskette Configuration” tab, Go To Diskette Controller. Press
Enter and Select “Disabled”. as in Figure 7-27 on page 47
Figure 7-27 Disable Diskette Controller
11.)Press ‘ESC”
12.)Under “Advanced” --> ”USB Configuration” tab, Under “2.0 Legacy Support” ,Set the
USB speed to “HiSpeed”
Set it has Enabled
Select "HISPEED"
13.)Press ESC
14.)Press “F10”.
15.)Popup Screen appears on the screen.
Chapter 7 7-47
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
16.)Click on “OK” to Save all the changes and exit as per Figure 7-28 on page 48
Figure 7-28 Save changes before Exiting BIOS
17.)Reboot the System.
7-6-16 Sn73077-PC2IP Driver installation on BEP 2 System with PC2IP II board
APPLIES TO:
This Service Note applies to the LOGIQ 3 Systems with BEP 2 while loading the base softwares shown below.
Table 7-3 Base Software Part numbers for L3 Systems
Base Software
Expert
Pro
B/W
Part Number
5120162
5140647
5140659
Revision
Rev 2
Rev 2
Rev 2
PROBLEM:
PC2IP drivers are not installed automatically when the base software version 4.0.0 is installed. The
System displays the error screen shown below when the system is rebooted after loading the Base software and prior to loading of application software.
7-48 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 7 7-49
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
SOLUTION:
Follow the instructions given in the PROCEDURE section of this service note to install the PC2IP driver on the system.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the instructions below to install the PC2IP driver for the system.
1.) Select the option as shown in the below figure and select "Next".
2.) Select the option as shown in the below figure and select "Next"
7-50 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3.) Select "GE Healthcare" and then Select "Next"
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4.) The below figure appears on the screen. Select "Pc2Ip" and then press "Next"
Chapter 7 7-51
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
5.) Update Driver Warning dialog box appears on the screen, Press "Yes" to proceed.
6.) The below figure appears on the screen press"Finish" to complete the process of Installation.
7-52 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7.) To check whether the drivers are installed, goto the device manager by double clicking the shortcut for device manager on the desktop. Collapse the GEHealthcare option as shown in the Picture below and check if all the 3 image ports are appearing under this option.
If all the image ports are present in the GEHealthcare component, the PC2IP driver is now installed in your system. Now, Proceed with installation of the application software.
7-6-17 Sn73075-Introduction of New Receive Board
APPLIES TO :
PROBLEM:
Logiq 3 Systems with Noise in the Far field of the Image Area .
White Band/Streak/Noise/Artifact in the Far Field of the Image Area.
Chapter 7 7-53
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
The figure below shows this far field artifact on the Image area.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CAUSE:
SOLUTION:
Oscillations of the VCA Chip on the Receive Board at lower temperature in Receive Board, PN
2318122-2.
Replace the existing Receive Board with the new improved Receive Board FRU, Part Number:
2318122-3.
7-54 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-18 Sn73074:Introduction of FMI 73066-Monitor MCU Replacement and Brightness
HV adjustment
APPLIES TO :
LOGIQ 3 Systems with Monitors having the following Serial Number Range:
PROBLEMS:
1.) Brightness fluctuation
Sudden brightness changes when monitor brightness is adjusted.
Right after adjusting the brightness, display suddenly turns dark or bright. Brightness may change during normal usage even without any user intervention.
2.) Color tinge
Monitor display is a little bluish, greenish, or reddish.
One of primary colors(R, G, B) have been decreased beyond the auto compensation range of internal circuit.
NOTICE:
If one of Red, Green, or Blue color is completely gone, it may not be a color tinge problem. Check the signal cable connection from BEP to monitor.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Procedure to Isolate whether the Color Tinge is due to internal cable of the Monitor:
Switch on the LOGIQ 3 system. Manipulate the cables as indicated below, while looking at the monitor.
1.) If there is no change in the Monitor color while performing this, it indicates that this issue is associated with the monitor. In this event refer FMI 73066 Instructions for further actions.
2.) If the color changes while performing the cable manipulation, repeat the same to confirm that there is an issue with the cable internal to the monitor. In this event, the monitor will need replacement since this cable cannot be replaced in the field.
Chapter 7 7-55
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
VGA Connector 1
VGA Connector 2
NOTE: " VGA cable connector 1 can be seen when the Keyboard Rear cover is removed and VGA
Connector 2 is connected to the monitor and can be seen on removal of Monitor Covers "
NOTICE
If these issues are not resolved by executing this FMI, Replace monitor with the latest version of the monitor
(PN: 2319551-5).
Guidelines for determining the Applicability of the FMI
Monitor Serial
Number
Monitor Part Number is displayed here.
The part number is 2319551-X, where X indicates the version of the monitor
7-56 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
The FMI Kit 5159437 comprises of 2 MCU(MICOM) versions. The MICOM should be selected depending on the part number of the monitor. Please refer to the table below for MICOM selection with respect to the Monitor Part Number.
M o n i to r P a r t N u m b e r
2 3 1 9 5 5 1 - 1 , 2 3 1 9 5 5 1 - 2 , 2 3 1 9 5 5 1 - 3
2 3 1 9 5 5 1 - 4
SOLUTION:
M C U v e r s io n
W I P 0 2 A . F 0 5 0 8
W I P 0 2 B . F 0 5 0 8
The problems mentioned in the section “PROBLEMS” can be resolved by executing the FMI 73066 (Kit Part Number:
5159437) as mentioned in the FMI instructions 5159456. Please read the instructions carefully before execution of the
FMI.
Chapter 7 7-57
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-19 Sn73073-Introduction of FMI 73069 for CHINA
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ 3 systems installed in China after Jan 1st, 2003 and manufactured before 1st April, 2005.
PROBLEM:
1.) The Power cord shipped with the LOGIQ 3 systems to China during the above period are not complying with the new Chinese Regulatory requirements.
2.) The Hardcopy of the Chinese Manuals given to the customers did not contain the SFDA
Registration number and the Product registration number.
CAUSE:
1.) To Comply with Chinese Regulatory Requirements pertaining to the use of CCC marked (both the plugs and the Cable) Power Cord.
2.) To provide the customer with the hardcopy of Manuals in Chinese as per Chinese regulatory requirements.
SOLUTION:
The above-mentioned problems will be resolved by the execution of the FMI-73069. The FMI Kit comprises of the Power cord with the Plug, Socket and the Cable having CCC mark. This Power cord hence complies with Chinese regulatory requirements. The FMI kit assembly with the chinese manuals will be completed at GE Healthcare, China.
For detailed procedure of the FMI execution, Refer to the FMI instructions (PN:5149669) provided in the
FMI kit. Place Orders for the Kit (PN:5149657) to GE Healthcare China.
For any clarifications on the FMI, please contact the Pole OLC/ Zheng, Xue_Hua / Bah, ChewYin for support. For urgent help, contact Zheng, Xue_Hua at 8621-5257 4640 ext.64131.
7-58 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-20 Sn73064-CWD Option Kit Usage for LOGIQ
TM
3
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems.
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Ignore All previous Service notes regarding CWD Option Kit, including Service Note
73043A. This Service Note preceeds all other service notes with respect CWD Option Kit.
PROBLEM:
Usage of the various CWD Kits for LOGIQ
TM
3
SOLUTION:
NOTE: The CWD Upgrade has to be performed on systems with software version R2.2.1 and
Above only. If the software on the system is of version lower than R2.2.1, please perform the FMI 73060 on the system before performing the CWD upgrade.
Refer to the system serial number and the table below for the selection of the proper kit.
Pole
Europe
Australia
China and Hong Kong
Japan
Korea
Singapore
Americas
System Serial
Number
5115WS1 and onwards
3508WS9 and onwards
4279WS6 and onwards
3442WS1 and onwards
2795WS3 and onwards
5247WS2 and
5361WS3 onwards
All Systems
Table 7-4 Selection of the CWD Kit
Kit to be used
2365752(H41722LY)
2365752(H41722LY)
2365752(H41722LY)
2365752(H41722LY)
2365752(H41722LY)
2365752(H41722LY)
2401844(H41742LM)
System Serial
Number Kit to be used
2401844(H41742LM) Below 5115WS1
Below 3508WS9 2401844(H41742LM)
2401844(H41742LM) Below 4279WS6
Below 3442WS1 2401844(H41742LM)
Below 2795WS3
Below 5361WS3 except 5247WS2
2401844(H41742LM)
2401844(H41742LM)
CAUTION
The Kit 2401844 contains the Transmit board 2 (2318124-2). If this board is not used, then on activating the CWD mode, the Probe will become very hot, which may result in injury.
This will also permanently damage the probe if the system is operated in such a way.
Chapter 7 7-59
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-21 SN-73061:Replacement of LOGIQ
TM
3 Hardware FRU
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems.
PROBLEM:
Change of FRUs and Introduction of New FRUs.
SOLUTION:
New FRUs Introduced.
7-6-21-1 Change of FRUs.
The following FRUs have changed.
Old Part
Number
2332968
2318126
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Old Part
Description
RPA Fuse 3A for
LOGIQ 3
DBF Board for
LOGIQ 3
New Part
Number
5117766
New Part
Description
2Amps
Thermal
Circuit
Breaker
Reason For
Change
Changed for
Regulatory
Complainace
Compatibility
Forward and Backward
5129931
DBF2 Board for LOGIQ 3
Productivity
Forward and Backward.
This FRU includes
Software R2.2.2, which is needed for the new DBF board
2277105
2319551-3
2361975-4
2318124-2
HVPS Assy for
LOGIQ 3
Monitor
Assembly for
LOGIQ 3
BEP2 Assy for
LOGIQ 3
Transmit board pcb for LOGIQ 3
2390954-2
2319551-4
5126610
2318124-3
DBHV Power
Supply for
LOGIQ 3
Monitor
Assembly for
LOGIQ 3
BEP3 Assy for
LOGIQ 3
Localization of Power supply
Change in
MICOM software
Obsoloscens e of BEP2
Transmit board pcb for
LOGIQ 3
Solution for
Diagnostics error
Implemented
- TX_TPG2
Error
Resolved.
Forward and Backward
Forward and Backward
Forward and Backward
Forward and Backward
Table 7-5 Change of FRUs
7-60 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-22 SN-73058:Various Boards Used the LOGIQ
TM
3
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems
PROBLEM:
This service note is to inform the field of the various existent variations of the major components of the
LOGIQTM 3 in the field.
Sl. NO
1
2
3
This table will be updated every time a new part variant is released.
De s cr ip tio n
Trans mit Board f or USA Model
(H41702LH / 2327754)
Trans mit Board f or all other models other then USA
Par t
Nu m b e r
2318124
2318124
Rec eiv e Board 2318122
V ar iatio n
Nu m b e r
-
2
2
V ar 2
CW D s upport added
Diagnos tic s is s ue
(Channel f ailure error) s olv ed
V ar 3 V ar 4
4 DBF Board 2318126 -
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
22
23
24
25
26
27
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6
7
Front End Controller A s s y 2277093
Bac k plane Board
Raide board A s s y - part of option kit
CW D board A s s y - part of option kit
Connec tor Board
HV PS A s s y
A CI PCB A s s y
Rear Panel Interf ac e board as s y
Key board
2318120
2288838
2401834
2318128
2277105
2319490
2319484
2319549
BEP as s y 2361975
LV PS A s s y
Rear Panel A s s y (100/115V )
Rear Panel A s s y (230V )
Front Panel A s s y
Trans f ormer A s s y
Monitor as s y
Bas e Sy s tem Sof tw are load
Image Rel 2.0.1
2319545
2383299
2319547
2383298
2342032
2319551
2378390
A pplic ation Sof tw are Rel 2.0.2
2356515
Patc h Sof tw are Rel 2.0.3
TSB # 1 Board A s s embly
RFC board A s s embly
RFC2 board A s s embly only w ith CW D
Front Panel A s s embly
2401921
2319492
2319480
2379706
2383298
6
-
-
2
2
2
-
3
-
-
-
-
-
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
3
4
FEC - 4 FEC - 5
F irs t Releas e for L3
CW D s upport added
CW D c onnec tors CW D nois e
FEC - 6
Interm ittent hang is s ues s olved ,
F ix es the
HW id error
Initial releas e
Coded harmonic s f or
L5
3rd Probe port s upport
Initial releas e
Inrus h c urrent limit
Rev ers e c apac itor polarity
Intel motherboard
Supermic ro w ith R
202 Intel w ith R 202
R 202. V C7 s of tw are
R 203. TI and
Probe temp f ix
Chapter 7 7-61
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-23 SN-73056:Back Plane Board and Continuous Wave Doppler Board FRUs
APPLIES TO:
All LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems
PROBLEM:
In Some LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems, If Continuous Wave Doppler Option is Installed, during the Pulse Wave
Doppler Operation with a liner probe, some noise lines will be seen in the image. This will happen only on systems where the CWD board is 2379704.
SOLUTION:
To Correct this issue, the CWD board and the Back Plane Board have been re-designed. The existing
CWD Board and BPB will have to replaced. This New CWD Board is available as a FRU.
As the Design change involves both the CWD and the BPB board, both will have to be replaced. The
Single Part FRU that has both these boards is the 2405514.
Also, if the BPB - 2318120-2 fails, then it has to be replaced by 2318120-3, available as a part of the
FRU - 2328381-3.
If CWD is Installed in systems with BPB 2318120-2, the CWD also has to be changed, as the old CWD board will not function with the Old BPB 2318120-2.
The above mentioned replacements are given in the Matrix below.
SL. No Defective Board
3
4
1
2
CWD - 2379704
CWD - 2401834
BPB - 2318120 -2
BPB - 2318120 -3
Other Board Present Replace with FRU GPN#
BPB - 2318120 -2
BPB - 2318120 -3
CWD - 2379704
CWD - 2401834
2405514
2401834
2405514
2328381-3
7-62 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-24 SN-73055:Intermittent Hang Issues Related to the FEC.
APPLIES TO:
This issue will affect all LOGIQ
TM
3 Systems having Serial Numbers prior to those listed below.
Table 7-6 Effected Systems Serial Numbers
Model
Europe
China
USA
Japan
GPN#
2327752
2327749
2327754
2327748
Serial Number
5115WS1
4279WS6
5569WS9
3442WS1
PROBLEM:
The Issues seen are one or more of the Following
3.) In Systems with the FEC-4, some systems may show intermittent Hang issues. This can be confirmed by Physically checking the version of the FEC board. The Board Part Number will be as seen in the figure below - Figure 7-29 on page 63
Figure 7-29 Checking the FEC-4 Part number
Chapter 7 7-63
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
4.) The systems will show a message asking to enter the Option keys. The Hardware Id Shown in this screen will be different from the actual Hardware Id on the system.A sample box can be seen in
Figure 7-30 on page 64 below.I
Figure 7-30 Asking For Option Keys
In such cases, The FEC U5 Eprom will have to be replaced.
SOLUTION:
1.) If the FEC version for Problem 1 is FEC -4, the The FEC has to be replaced by a FEC -6.
2.) The Correct Hardware ID can be checked in the following way. In Start\Run, Type in
"d:\L3_Drivers\SH_Tools\PC2IPIIC_ACI.exe", as shown in Figure 7-31 on page 64 below.
7-64
Figure 7-31 Selecting the tool.
This will bring a screen as shown below. THE Hardware ID can be checked as shown in the screen as shown in Figure 7-32 on page 65 below
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 7-32 Checking the Hardware ID
If the Hardware ID appearing in Figure 7-32 on page 65 does not match the Hardware ID in Figure
7-30 on page 64 , then the U5 EPROM will have to be replaced. This replacement process is given below.
Chapter 7 7-65
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
MODIFICATION PROCEDURE
WARNING: - TAKE PROPER ESD PRECAUTIONS OR THE BOARD OR THE COMPONENTS
MAY GET PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.
1.) Locate the U5 EPROM on the FEC Board as shown in Figure 7-33 on page 66 .
7-66
Figure 7-33 Location and Orientation of the U5 EPROM
2.) Replace These EPROMs With the Latest Version of the EPROM, Rev4. The New version of the EPROM is shown in Figure 7-33 on page 66 above
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
3.) These EPROMs can be obtained from the following People in the various service regions.
Table 7-7 Contact Persons
Sl. No
3
4
1
2
5
6
Pole
Americas
Europe
Japan
China
SEA
India
Contact Person
Anna Shikhman
Chris Auer
Takatoshi Kumagai
Pei Feng Cheng (William Cheng)
William KM On
Shilpa M. K.
Chapter 7 7-67
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-25 SN-73053:BACK UP AND RESTORE PROCESS IN LOGIQ
TM
3
APPLIES TO:ALL LOGIQ
TM
3 SYSTEMS
7-6-25-1
7-6-25-2
Back up Process
Formatting Media
1.) In the imaging mode, ensure that the back up media, a MOD or a Writable CD is inserted in its Drive.
2.) in the imaging mode, go to Utilities\Connectivity\Tools as shown in the figure below. Select the appropriate media from the Dropdown list as shown.
3.) Fill in a label name for the media. Then, click on FORMAT.
7-6-25-3
Figure 7-34 Formatting the Media
Taking a Backup
1.) Insert the media in its Drive.
1.) In the imaging mode, go to Utilities\System\Backup/Restore
2.) Select on "User Defined Configuration" as shown.
7-68 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3.) Then Click on Backup.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-25-4
Figure 7-35 Backup Process
Restore Process
1.) Insert the media in tis Drive.
2.) In the imaging mode, go to Utilities\System\Backup/Restore
3.) Select "User Defined Configuration"
Chapter 7 7-69
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4.) Click on Restore.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 7-36 Restore Process
7-70 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-6-26 SN-73051:Monitor Signal Issues
APPLIES TO:ALL LOGIQ
TM
3 SYSTEMS
PROBLEM:
There will not be any image on the monitor, but it will give a message saying "Input Frequency Out
Range" or "No signal"
SOLUTION:
This is an issue with the improper seating of the monitor cables from the BEP to the Monitor.
This can be resolved by reseating the monitor cables.
The process is shown below.
1.) Locate and remove the two screw caps at positions A and B.
2.) Remove the two screws at positions C and D using a coin or a " - " Screw driver.
3.) Lift and remove the Keyboard Rear Cover.
4.) Locate the two connectors as shown in the Figure 7-37 on page 72 .
5.) Open these connectors and reconnect them to the system.
6.) Open the Rear cover and the Rear EMI cover.
7.) Locate the Monitor Cable from the BEP as shown and reseat this cable also.
Chapter 7 7-71
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8.) Reassenbvle all components in the order of removal.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
A
B
D
C
Monitor Cable
from BEP
Figure 7-37 Reseating Montor Cable.
7-72 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-27 SN-73050:Maintenance Mode in LOGIQ
TM
3
APPLIES TO:ALL LOGIQ
TM
3 SYSTEMS
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
PROBLEM:
It is possible to use the Key Sequence "Ctrl+Alt+Del" with the Service Dongle to go to Maintenance
Mode. This is a wrong Process to go to maintenance mode and can cause system data corruption.
SOLUTION:
It is best to use the Service Dongle with the following process to go to the maintenance mode.
1.) In the imaging mode, to go to the Maintenance mode, insert the Service Dongle and then press
“Ctrl+Alt+R” keys
2.) Click on “Yes” as shown in the figure below.
Figure 7-38 Log Off Screen
3.) Now, Enter the service password and enter the maintenance mode.
Chapter 7 7-73
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-28 SN-73049:Hardware ID Generation on the ACI board.
APPLIES TO:ALL LOGIQ
TM
3 SYSTEMS
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
PROBLEM:
When we do an ACI Replacement, if we do not do the following steps, the system will pop up a window asking for the Option Keys. Also, as this is a Case sensitive process, improper case usage will cause this problem.
SOLUTION:
1.) Before Replacing the ACI Board, start the system and go to the Utilities\Admin\System Admin Tab
2.) There, note down the system Serial Number as shown. Please note the proper case of the characters, i.e. if the serial number has Characters in the lower case, please note it in the lower case only.
7-74
Figure 7-39 Location of the Serial Number
3.) After replacement of ACI PCB restart the system.
4.) Go to Maintenance Mode.
5.) Click on My Computer Icon.
6.) Double Click on D:\L3_Drivers\SH_Tools\PC2IPIIC_ACI
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7.) The following Screen Appears.
Key in ACI Board Serial No. As labeled on the ACI
Board - Example of the Sl# ACIU503E010001
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Key in ACI Part No. as labeled on the board- Example - 2319490
Key in ACI Part Rev No. as labeled on the board- Example - REV1
Key in the System Serial Number as in the Rating
Plate affixed at rear of system in Transformer Assy
Example - 2974WS4
Figure 7-40 ACI Board H/W Serial Number Screen
Chapter 7 7-75
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-76
Figure 7-41 ACI Board
8.) After entering the system serial #, ACI serial #, ACI Part # and ACI Rev#, Click on Write
9.) Hardware ID is generated, close the window.
10.)Shut down the system and restart the system in the normal mode. Start Echoloader and ensure that system boots properly to image screen and check Basic B- Mode Functions.
Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-6-29 SN-73048:Preset Restore
APPLIES TO:ALL LOGIQ
TM
3 SYSTEMS
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
PROBLEM:
If the Backup of a customers data is made on one system and if this data is restored on a completely different system, then on rebooting this, system, it will ask for the Software Option Keys.
This is standard behaviour.
When we make a backup of data on one system, the option keys of that system also get stored on the
Backup CD. When this data is restored on a completely different system, the restore process will overwrite the existing option keys and replace them with the option keys of the original system. On rebooting any system, a check of the option key against the Sysiem serial number is done. For the system on which the restore was done, this data will not match as the option keys are for the system on which the backup was done. This causes the system to ask for the option keys.
SOLUTION:
A possible solutin is being looked for in the next software release.
PROBLEM:
On restoring the Presets made on the software version R1.2.0 on a system with software R2.0.0 and above, it system will ask for Optin Keys.
SOLUTION:
The presets backed up on the R1.2.0 systems should not be restored on systems with software versions
R2.0.2 and later
Chapter 7 7-77
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
This page was intentionally left blank.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
7-78 Section 7-6 - Service Notes
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 8-1
Overview
8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8
This chapter describes replacement procedures for the following modules and subsystems.
8-1-2
NOTE:
Section
8-1
Description
8-2
Overview
Monitor
8-3
Keyboard
8-4
8-5
Mechanicals
I/O Interfaces
8-6
PCB
8-7
Power Block
8-8
Software Loading Procedure
8-9
Base Load Software Load
8-10
Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
8-11
Installing Option Software
8-12
Loading Base and Application Software
Table 8-1 Contents in Chapter 8
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Page Number
8-1
8-94
8-118
8-131
8-135
8-3
8-13
8-33
8-82
8-146
8-161
8-163
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.
Chapter 8 8-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD REMOVE ANY COVERS OR
PANELS. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS EXISTS AT SEVERAL POINTS INSIDE. BECOME
THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENT
LEVELS TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-2
Monitor
8-2-1
8-2-1-1
8-2-1-2
8-2-1-3
8-2-1-4
8-2-1-5
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Monitor Assy (FRU No. 100)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Monitor Assy.
Tools
• Coin / "-" Screw Driver
Needed Manpower
• 2 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4 .
Removal procedure
Refer to Figure 8-1 on page 8-3 .
1.) Remove the See “Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)” on page 57.
2.) Remove 2 connectors from the monitor (between CN601 & CN602 and VGA Connection).
3.) Unscrew the rotation stopper screw using coin or ’-’ screw driver.
4.) Lift the Monitor Assy upward.
The weight of the monitor is approximately 20 kg. Two person are needed in the next step.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
VGA Connector
Connectors CN601 & CN602
Figure 8-1 MONITOR ASSY DISASSEMBLY
Chapter 8
Rotation Stopper Screw
8-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-1-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
7-5-2
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
PC Diagnostics
Leakage Current
8-4 Section 8-2 - Monitor
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-2 Monitor Cover Left (FRU No. 101)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove the Monitor Cover Left.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-2-2-1
8-2-2-2
8-2-2-3
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers, Stub B
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut down the System and switch off the Circuit breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4 .
8-2-2-4 Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-2 on page 8-5 .
1.) Remove 2 screws (a,b) from left cover.
2.) Remove See “Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)” on page 57.
3.) Rotate Monitor to Right 90
×
, Use Stub B screwdriver to remove the screw (c) in the bottom.
4.) Remove the See “Task Lamp (FRU No. 106)” on page 12.
5.) Remove the Monitor Cover Left by pulling backwards.
a c b
8-2-2-5
Figure 8-2 Monitor Cover Left
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-3 Monitor Cover Right (FRU No. 102)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove the Monitor Cover Right.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-2-3-1
8-2-3-2
8-2-3-3
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers, Stub B
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut down the System and switch off the Circuit breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4 .
8-2-3-4 Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-3 on page 8-6 .
1.) Remove 2 screws (a,b) from monitor right cover.
2.) Remove See “Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)” on page 57.
3.) Rotate Monitor to left 90
×
, Use Stub B screwdriver to remove the screw (c) in the bottom.
4.) Remove the Monitor Cover right by pulling backwards.
a c b
8-2-3-5
Figure 8-3 Monitor Cover Right
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-6 Section 8-2 - Monitor
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-4 Monitor Cover Top (FRU No. 103)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove the Monitor Cover Top.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-2-4-1
8-2-4-2
8-2-4-3
8-2-4-4
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut down the System and switch off the Circuit breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4 .
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-4 on page 8-7 .
1.) Remove See “Monitor Cover Right (FRU No. 102)” on page 6.
2.) Slide the monitor cover top to right side and remove.
Slide the monitor top to right side and remove
8-2-4-5
Figure 8-4 Monitor Cover Top
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-5 Monitor Cover Front (Bezel) (FRU No. 104)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove the Monitor Cover Front (Bezel).
8-2-5-1
8-2-5-2
8-2-5-3
8-2-5-4
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut down the System and switch off the Circuit breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4 .
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-5 on page 8-8 .
1.) Remove See “Monitor Cover Left (FRU No. 101)” on page 5.
2.) Remove See “Monitor Cover Right (FRU No. 102)” on page 6.
3.) Remove See “Monitor Cover Top (FRU No. 103)” on page 7.
4.) Loosen 2 Screws (a, b) from right side & 2 Screws (c,d) from left side.
5.) Pull the Monitor Cover front
6.) Disconnect Monitor Switch Cable Assembly.
a c b d
Monitor Switch Cable
8-8
Figure 8-5 Monitor Cover Front
Section 8-2 - Monitor
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-5-5 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-6 Monitor Switch (S/W) Assy (FRU No. 105)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Monitor S/W Assy.
8-2-6-1
8-2-6-2
8-2-6-3
8-2-6-4
8-2-6-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 10 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-6 on page 8-10
1.) Remove the See “Monitor Cover Front (Bezel) (FRU No. 104)” on page 8.
2.) Unscrew two screws (1-2).
3.) Remove the Monitor S/W Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
2
8-10
Figure 8-6 Monitor Switch Assy
Section 8-2 - Monitor
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-6-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
PC Diagnostics
Chapter 8 8-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-2-7 Task Lamp (FRU No. 106)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Task Lamp.
8-2-7-1
8-2-7-2
8-2-7-3
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers, Stub B
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-2-7-4
8-2-7-5
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-7 on page 8-12
1.) Remove the See “Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)” on page 57.
2.) Rotate CRT by 90
×
left.
3.) Unscrew two screws (a, b) using Stub B screwdriver.
4.) Unthread the task lamp and remove.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Rotate CRT by 90
° left b a
TASKLAMP
Figure 8-7 Task Lamp
8-2-7-6
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional Checkout Procedure
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-2-7 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-12 Section 8-2 - Monitor
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-3
Keyboard
8-3-1
8-3-1-1
8-3-1-2
8-3-1-3
8-3-1-4
8-3-1-5
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Assy
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Circuit Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-8 on page 8-14 .
1.) Remove the See “Probe Holder (FRU No. 201)” on page 15.
2.) Unscrew two screws (g, h) fixing VGP tray.
3.) Slide out the tray. If VGP is Fixed, disconnect the VGP cables from front panel.
4.) Unscrew five screws (a, b, c, d, e). loosen 1 screw (f)
5.) Lift the Keyboard Up
6.) Disconnect the Three USB cables (1,2, 5), one 26 Pin cable(3),
7.) Remove Keyboard Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-3-1-6
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional Checkout Procedure
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
Chapter 8 8-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-1 KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)
(cont’d) a g
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
b c d e h f
3
2
1
5
8-14
Probe Holder
Figure 8-8 Keyboard Assembly
Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-2 Probe Holder (FRU No. 201)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Probe Holder
8-3-2-1
8-3-2-2
8-3-2-3
8-3-2-4
8-3-2-5
Tools
• None
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 5 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Remove Probes from the Holder & the connector, place it in a safe place.
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-9 on page 8-15 .
1.) Disconnect Probes and remove from the probe holder.
2.) Lift the Probe Holder from the Bracket.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
FRU 201
Figure 8-9 Probe Holder
CAUTION
Place the Probes back in the Probe Holder.
Chapter 8 8-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-2-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-16 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-3 Speaker Pair
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose:This Instruction describes the Removal and Replacement of the Speaker Pair.
8-3-3-1
8-3-3-2
8-3-3-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers and standarad Engineer’s Tool Kit.
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 30 minutes + travel
Preparations
Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear
8-3-3-4 Removal Procedure
1
3
2
4
7
5
8
6
8-3-3-5
Figure 8-10 Speaker Pair
1.) Remove 8 screws (1-8), Indicated With in the section 8-10
2.) Remove Speaker Pairs from the system.
Mounting procedure
1.) Replace Defective Speaker Pair with new Speaker Pair(2319526)
2.) Refix 8 screws (1-8).
3.) Refix The Key Board Assy.
4.) Refix Probe Holder.
Chapter 8 8-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-3-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test
PC Diagnostics:
Audio Tests
Debrief Script
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
7-5-2
8-18 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-4 Keyboard TGC Assy (FRU No. 202)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard TGC Assy
8-3-4-1
8-3-4-2
8-3-4-3
8-3-4-4
8-3-4-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Disassemble the See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Place the Keyboard Assy on a Table
3.) Remove TGC cap from the Keyboard Assy
4.) Remove cable A
5.) Remove four screws (a-d)
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
FRU 203
d
A a b c
TGC Caps
Figure 8-11 TGC Assembly
Chapter 8 8-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-4-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
8-20 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-5 HUB PCB Assy (FRU No. 203)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the HUB PCB Assy.
8-3-5-1
8-3-5-2
8-3-5-3
8-3-5-4
8-3-5-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Disassemble the See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Remove Cables (C1, C2, C3, C4) from the HUB PCB Assy.
3.) Remove cable (C5) which is running over the HUB PCB to remove screw d.
4.) Unscrew four screws (a, b, c,d). Screw d not shown in the figure.
5.) Remove the HUB PCB Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 8-12 HUB PCB Assy
Chapter 8 8-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-5-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
8-22 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-6 A/N Keyboard Assy (FRU No. 204)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the A/N Keyboard Assy.
8-3-6-1
8-3-6-2
8-3-6-3
8-3-6-4
8-3-6-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Disassemble the See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Remove See “HUB PCB Assy (FRU No. 203)” on page 21.
3.) Unscrew five screws (a, b, c,d, e).
4.) Unscrew one screw (f) along with GND cable (C1)
5.) Remove A/N Keyboard Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
a b e
C1 d f c
Figure 8-13 A/N Keyboard Assy
Chapter 8 8-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-6-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
8-24 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-7 Keyboard Trackball Assy (FRU No. 205)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Trackball Assy.
8-3-7-1
8-3-7-2
8-3-7-3
8-3-7-4
8-3-7-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Unscrew two screws (a, b)
3.) Unscrew one screw (c) along with GND cable.
4.) Remove cable (C1) from the Trackball.
5.) Remove the Trackball.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
C1 a
FRU 206
b
Figure 8-14 Keyboard Trackball Assy
C1
Chapter 8
c
GND
8-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-7-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-7 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
8-26 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-8 Keyboard - Freeze Key Assy (FRU No. 206)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard - Freeze Key Assy
8-3-8-1
8-3-8-2
8-3-8-3
8-3-8-4
8-3-8-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Disconnect Cable C1 from Freeze PCB
3.) Unscrew three screws (a, b & c). While remove screw (a) remove GND cable (C2)
4.) Remove Freeze Key Assy
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
a b
C2
C1 c
Figure 8-15 Keyboard - Freeze Key Assy
Chapter 8 8-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-8-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-8 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
8-28 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-9
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power switch and Encoder PCB Assy (FRU 207).
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard -Power switch and Encoder
PCB Assy
8-3-9-1
8-3-9-2
8-3-9-3
8-3-9-4
8-3-9-5
8-3-9-6
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Unscrew Four screws (a, b, c & d).
3.) Disconnect Cable C1 from KBD
4.) Remove the 5 Caps
5.) Remove nine screws (a-i) and pull out Power Switch & Encoder PCB Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-9 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
Chapter 8 8-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
a b c d
C1 a b c e g d f h
Figure 8-16 Keyboard - Power switch and Encoder PCB Assy
i
8-30 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-3-10 Keyboard Power Cable (FRU 208).
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Power Cable
8-3-10-1
8-3-10-2
8-3-10-3
8-3-10-4
8-3-10-5
8-3-10-6
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Disconnect Cable C1 from KBD
3.) Remove the See “Rear EMI Cover” on page 63.
4.) Disconnect the other end of the Cable C1 from RPI Board.
5.) Pull out the Cable from the system.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-3-10 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics:
Keyboard Tests
Chapter 8 8-31
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
C1
Figure 8-17 Keyboard - Power Cable
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
C1
8-32 Section 8-3 - Keyboard
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-4
Mechanicals
8-4-1
8-4-1-1
8-4-1-2
8-4-1-3
8-4-1-4
8-4-1-5
8-4-1-6
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Right Cover (FRU No. 300)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Right Cover.
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-4-1 on page 8-33 .
1.) Unscrew six screws (1-6).
2.) Remove the Right Cover in the direction as shown in the Figure below.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-33
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
6
5
Figure 8-18 Right Cover
1
3
4
2
8-34 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-2 Left Cover (FRU No. 301)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Left Cover.
8-4-2-1
8-4-2-2
8-4-2-3
8-4-2-4
8-4-2-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
1.) Unscrew 6 screws (1-6).
2.) Remove the Left Cover in the direction as shown in the figure below.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
A
2
A. After removing the screws(1-6), then remove the left cover in the direction of arrow.
Figure 8-19 Left Cover
Chapter 8
6
4
5
3
8-35
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-2-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-36 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-3 Rear Cover (FRU No. 302)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Cover.
8-4-3-1
8-4-3-2
8-4-3-3
8-4-3-4
8-4-3-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-20 on page 8-37 .
1.) Unscrew six screws (1-6).
2.) Lift and remove the Rear Cover.
Mounting procedure
.
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
1
4
2
5
3
6
Figure 8-20 Rear Cover
Chapter 8 8-37
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-3-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-38 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White
NOTE: For LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT, refer to 8-4-5 "Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3
EXPERT" on page 8-41
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Bumper.
8-4-4-1
8-4-4-2
8-4-4-3
8-4-4-4
8-4-4-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-21 on page 8-39 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Unscrew four screws (a, b, c, d).
4.) Lift the Front Bumper at sides, Press in the Middle of Front Cover to remove the front bumper
Mounting procedure
.
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal a b d c
Figure 8-21 Front Bumper
Chapter 8
Push and Pull the Front Bumper
8-39
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-4-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-40 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-5 Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
For LOGIQ™ 3 PRO and LOGIQ™ 3 Black and White, refer to 8-4-4 "Front Bumper (FRU No.
303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White" on page 8-39
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Bumper.
8-4-5-1
8-4-5-2
8-4-5-3
8-4-5-4
8-4-5-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-21 on page 8-39 .
1.) Remove Right Cover. See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove Left Cover. See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Unscrew four screws (a, b, c, d).
4.) Lift the Front Bumper at sides, Press in the Middle of Front Cover to remove the front bumper
Mounting procedure
.
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal a b
Figure 8-22 Front Bumper
Chapter 8
c d
8-41
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-5-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-42 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-6 Front Rubber Bumper Left (FRU No. 311)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Bumper Left.
8-4-6-1
8-4-6-2
8-4-6-3
8-4-6-4
8-4-6-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-25 on page 8-47 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Remove Front Bumper Left.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
8-4-6-6
Figure 8-23 Front Bumper Left
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Chapter 8 8-43
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-44 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-7 Front Rubber Bumper Right (FRU No. 312)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Bumper Right.
8-4-7-1
8-4-7-2
8-4-7-3
8-4-7-4
8-4-7-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-25 on page 8-47 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Remove Front Bumper Right.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
8-4-7-6
Figure 8-24 Front Bumper Right
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Chapter 8 8-45
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-7 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-46 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-8
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White
NOTE: For LOGIQ™ 3 Expert, refer to 8-4-8 "Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White" on page 8-47
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Cover.
8-4-8-1
8-4-8-2
8-4-8-3
8-4-8-4
8-4-8-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-25 on page 8-47 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Unscrew two screws (a, b, c, d)
5.) Remove Front Cover.
Mounting procedure
.
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
C
Figure 8-25 Front Cover
Chapter 8
D
8-47
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-8-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-8 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-48 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-9 Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
For LOGIQ™ 3 PRO and LOGIQ™ 3 Black and White, refer to 8-4-8 "Front Cover (FRU No.
304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White" on page 8-47
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Cover.
8-4-9-1
8-4-9-2
8-4-9-3
8-4-9-4
8-4-9-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-25 on page 8-47 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Unscrew two screws (a, b, c, d)
5.) Remove Front Cover.
Mounting procedure
.
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal a b
C
Figure 8-26 Front Cover
Chapter 8
D
8-49
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-9-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-9 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-50 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-10 Top Cover (FRU No. 305)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Top Cover.
8-4-10-1
8-4-10-2
8-4-10-3
8-4-10-4
8-4-10-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-27 on page 8-51 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Rear Cover (FRU No. 302)” on page 37.
4.) Remove See “Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White” on page 47.
5.) Remove See “Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)” on page 57.
6.) Unscrew four screws (1-4).
7.) Pull Up the Top Cover to remove.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
1
2
Figure 8-27 Top Cover Disassembly
Chapter 8 8-51
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-10-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-10 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-52 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-11 KeyBoard Bottom Cover (FRU No. 306)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Bottom Cover.
8-4-11-1
8-4-11-2
8-4-11-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 30 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-4-11-4 Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-28 on page 8-53 .
1.) Remove the See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) unscrew four screws (a, b, c, d) fixing VGP support Tray
CAUTION
Hold the VGP Support Tray below the Keyboard bottom from falling down.
8-4-11-5
3.) Unscrew eight screws (1-8).
4.) Remove the KBD Bottom Cover.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
a d b c
Figure 8-28 Keyboard Bottom
Chapter 8 8-53
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-11-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-11 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-54 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-12 KeyBoard Bumper (FRU No. 307)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Bumper.
8-4-12-1
8-4-12-2
8-4-12-3
8-4-12-4
8-4-12-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-4-12 on page 8-55 .
1.) Remove See “KeyBoard Assy (FRU No. 200)” on page 13.
2.) Unscrew four screws (a,b,c &d) from the Keyboard bottom.
3.) Remove KeyBoard Bumper.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal a b c
Keyboard Bumper d
Figure 8-29 Keyboard Bumper
Chapter 8 8-55
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-12-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-12 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-56 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-13 Keyboard Rear Cover (FRU No. 308)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Keyboard Rear Cover
8-4-13-1
8-4-13-2
8-4-13-3
8-4-13-4
8-4-13-5
Tools
• Coin/ "-" Stubby screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove two caps (a,b).
2.) Remove two screws(1,2) using coins / "-" Stub B screwdrivers
3.) Lift the Keyboard Rear cover Up and pull backwards to remove.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
b a
Use Coin to Uncsrew
1
2
Figure 8-30 Keyboard Rear Cover
Chapter 8 8-57
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-13-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-13 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-58 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-14 Left EMI Cover
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Left EMI Cover.
8-4-14-1
8-4-14-2
8-4-14-3
8-4-14-4
8-4-14-5
Tools
• Common phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-31 on page 8-59 .
1.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
2.) Unscrew eight screws (1-8).
3.) Remove the Left EMI Cover.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
2
1
3
4
8
7
6
5
Figure 8-31 Left EMI Cover Disassembly
Chapter 8 8-59
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-14-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-14 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
8-60 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-15 Right EMI Cover
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Right EMI Cover
8-4-15-1
8-4-15-2
8-4-15-3
8-4-15-4
8-4-15-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-32 on page 8-61 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Unscrew eight screws (1-8).
3.) Remove the EMI Cover R.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
8
5
4
6
7
2
3
Figure 8-32 Right EMI Cover Disassembly
Chapter 8 8-61
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-15-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-15 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
8-62 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-16 Rear EMI Cover
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear EMI Cover
8-4-16-1
8-4-16-2
8-4-16-3
8-4-16-4
8-4-16-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-33 on page 8-63 .
1.) Remove See “Rear Cover (FRU No. 302)” on page 37.
2.) Unscrew eight screws (1-10) holding the Rear EMI shield
3.) Remove the Rear EMI Shield.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
2
1
8
7
10
9
3
4
Figure 8-33 Rear EMI Cover Disassembly
Chapter 8
6
5
8-63
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-16-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-15 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
8-64 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-17 Nest EMI Cover
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Nest EMI Cover
8-4-17-1
8-4-17-2
8-4-17-3
8-4-17-4
8-4-17-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-34 on page 8-65 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Right EMI Cover” on page 61.
3.) Unscrew four screws (1-4) holding the Nest EMI Cover
4.) Remove the Nest EMI Cover.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
4
2
Figure 8-34 Nest EMI Cover Disassembly
3
Chapter 8 8-65
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-17-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-17 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
8-66 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-18 Front EMI Cover for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
For LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT, refer to 8-4-19 "Front EMI Cover for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT" on page
8-69
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front EMI Cover
8-4-18-1
8-4-18-2
8-4-18-3
8-4-18-4
8-4-18-5
8-4-18-6
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-35 on page 8-68 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Remove See “Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White” on page 47.
5.) Unscrew nine screws (1-9) holding the Front EMI Cover
6.) Remove the Front EMI Cover.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-18 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
Chapter 8 8-67
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1
7
8
9
3
2
Figure 8-35 Front EMI Cover Disassembly
4
5
6
8-68 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-19 Front EMI Cover for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
For LOGIQ™ 3 PRO and LOGIQ™ 3 Black and White, refer to 8-4-18 "Front EMI Cover for
LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White" on page 8-67
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front EMI Cover
8-4-19-1
8-4-19-2
8-4-19-3
8-4-19-4
8-4-19-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-35 on page 8-68 .
1.) Remove See “Right Cover (FRU No. 300)” on page 33.
2.) Remove See “Left Cover (FRU No. 301)” on page 35.
3.) Remove See “Front Bumper (FRU No. 303) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White” on page 39.
4.) Remove See “Front Cover (FRU No. 304) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO / Black and White” on page 47.
5.) Unscrew nine screws (1-9) holding the Front EMI Cover
6.) Remove the Front EMI Cover.
Mounting procedure
Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
7
8
9
3
2
Figure 8-36 Front EMI Cover Disassembly
4
5
Chapter 8
6
8-69
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-19-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-19 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Leakage Current
8-70 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-20 VGP Tray
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the VGP Tray.
8-4-20-1
8-4-20-2
8-4-20-3
8-4-20-4
8-4-20-5
Tools
• • Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• • 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• • Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
• Refer to Figure 8-23 on page 25 .
1.) Unscrew Two screws (1-2). Screw (2) is not visible.
2.) Slide the VGP Tray as shown by the arrow to remove. (If VGP is Fixed Remove VGP and connecting cables)
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
2
Figure 8-37 VGP Tray Disassembly
Chapter 8 8-71
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-20-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-20 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-72 Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-21 Handle Rod(FRU No. 400)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Handle.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-4-21-1
8-4-21-2
8-4-21-3
8-4-21-4
8-4-21-5
Tools
• Nil
Needed Manpower
• 1person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-38 on page 8-73 .
2.) Unscrew Handle rods anticlockwise.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Handle Rod
Handle Base
8-4-21-6
Figure 8-38 Handle Disassembly
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-21 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-73
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-22 Front Castor (FRU No. 401)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Castor.
8-4-22-1
8-4-22-2
8-4-22-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
• Allen/Unbraco wrench
Needed Manpower
• 2 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-4-22-4 Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-39 on page 8-74 .
1.) Place the wooden block below to lift the system
2.) Unscrew eight (8) hexagonal bolts (1-8).
3.) Remove the Front Castor.
CAUTION
One Person should hold the system while removing & replacing the Castors
8-4-22-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-74
Figure 8-39 Front Castor Disassembly
Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-22-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-22 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-75
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-23 Rear Castor (FRU No. 402)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Castor.
8-4-23-1
8-4-23-2
8-4-23-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
• Allen/Unbraco wrench
Needed Manpower
• 2 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-4-23-4 Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-40 on page 8-76 .
1.) Place the wooden block below to lift the system
2.) Unscrew eight hexagonal bolts (1-8).
3.) Remove the Rear Castor.
CAUTION
One Person should hold the system while removing & replacing the Castors
8-4-23-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-76
Figure 8-40 Rear Castor Disassembly
Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-23-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-23 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-77
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-24 Air Filter (FRU No. 403)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Air Filter.
8-4-24-1
8-4-24-2
8-4-24-3
8-4-24-4
8-4-24-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 5 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-41 on page 8-78 .
1.) Remove the Air Filter which is situated between Front Casters.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
8-4-24-6
Air Filter
Figure 8-41 Air Filter
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
8-78
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
Air Filter
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-24 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-79
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-4-25 Card Cage Fan Assy (FRU No. 404)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Card Cage Fan Assy.
8-4-25-1
8-4-25-2
8-4-25-3
8-4-25-4
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
CAUTION
An electronic discharge may damage a component. Turn OFF power and wear the wrist strap before you remove circuit boards. Do not unplug the power cord to keep ground continuity.
1.) Remove the Right Cover (FRU No. 300). Refer to section 8-4-1 on page 8-33
2.) Remove 1the Right EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-15 on page 8-61
3.) Disconnect cable connecting the fan.
4.) Remove two screws (a,b) fixing the Fan Assy
5.) Pull out the Fan Assy.
8-4-25-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Fan cable
a
Backplane
8-4-25-6
Figure 8-42 Fan Assembly
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
8-80
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Section 8-4 - Mechanicals
b
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-4-25 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-81
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-5
I/O Interfaces
8-5-1
8-5-1-1
8-5-1-2
8-5-1-3
8-5-1-4
8-5-1-5
8-5-1-6
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Rear Panel Assy (FRU No. 500)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Panel Assy.
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-5-1 on page 8-82 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63
3.) Unscrew four (4) screws (a, b, c,d) from the Rear Panel Assy.
4.) Remove two cable assy from ACI board and one from RPI board.
5.) Pull and Remove the Rear Panel Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
8-82 Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 a d b
Figure 8-43 Rear Panel Disassembly c
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 8 8-83
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-2 Rear Panel1 (RP1) Board (FRU No. 501)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Panel1.
8-5-2-1
8-5-2-2
8-5-2-3
8-5-2-4
8-5-2-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-5-1 on page 8-82 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63
3.) Remove Rear Panel (FRU No. 500). Refer to section 8-5-1 on page 8-82
4.) Remove three screws (a,b,c).
5.) Pull Rear Panel1 (RP1) Board.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-84
a b
Figure 8-44 Rear Panel1 (RP1) Disassembly
c
Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-2-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Chapter 8 8-85
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-3 Rear Panel2 (RP2) Board (FRU No. 502)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Panel2.
8-5-3-1
8-5-3-2
8-5-3-3
8-5-3-4
8-5-3-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-5-1 on page 8-82 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63
3.) Remove Rear Panel (FRU No. 500). Refer to section 8-5-1 on page 8-82
4.) Remove two stud screws(1-6) holding connectors Printer, COM1, COM2.
5.) Remove three screws (a,b,c).
6.) Pull Rear Panel2 (RP2) Board.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
2
6
5
3
4 a
Figure 8-45 Rear Panel1 (RP1) Disassembly
b c
8-86 Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-3-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Chapter 8 8-87
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-4 Rear Panel Interface (RPI) Board (FRU No. 503)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Panel Interface.
8-5-4-1
8-5-4-2
8-5-4-3
8-5-4-4
8-5-4-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-5-1 on page 8-82 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63
3.) Remove Rear Panel (FRU No. 500). Refer to section 8-5-1 on page 8-82
4.) Remove nine cables (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j) connected to the RPI Board
5.) Remove eleven screws marked.
6.) Pull the RPI Board out.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-88
Figure 8-46 Rear Panel Intrerface Board (RPI) Disassembly
Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-4-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Chapter 8 8-89
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-5 Front Panel (FRU No. 504)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Front Panel.
8-5-5-1
8-5-5-2
8-5-5-3
8-5-5-4
8-5-5-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to 8-5-1 on page 8-82 .
1.) Remove Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
2.) Remove Left Side Cover.
3.) Remove Left EMI Cover.
4.) Remove Rear Left EMI Support bracket
5.) Disconnect interconnect cables.
6.) Remove VGP Tray. Refer section 8-4-20 on page 71
7.) Unscrew four screws (a,b,c,d)
8.) Pull and remove the Front Panel
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
8-90
a c
Figure 8-47 Front Panel Disassembly
Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
b d
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-5-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Chapter 8 8-91
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-6 Rear Panel Fuse (FRU No. 505)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Rear Panel Fuse.
8-5-6-1
8-5-6-2
8-5-6-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-5-6-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-64 on page 8-127 .
1.) Remove Rear Panel Assy (FRU No. 500). Refer to Section 8-5-1 on page 8-82
2.) Remove two cables (a,b).
3.) Press and pull the Rear Panel fuse.
8-5-6-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
a
8-92
Figure 8-48 Rear Panel Fuse Disassembly
Section 8-5 - I/O Interfaces
b
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-5-6-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-5-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
Chapter 8 8-93
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-6
PCB
8-6-1
8-6-1-1
8-6-1-2
8-6-1-3
8-6-1-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
PCB Boards (FRU No. 601 ~ 605, 608, 609)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the PCB Boards.
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 10 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
CAUTION
An electronic discharge may damage a component. Turn OFF power and wear the wrist strap before you remove circuit boards. Do not unplug the power cord to keep ground continuity.
8-6-1-5
8-6-1-6
Do not bend or flex the boards when mounting/dismounting each boards. Surface mount IC boards are very susceptible to damage from flex/torque.
Refer to Figure 8-49 on page 8-96 .
1.) Remove the Right Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-1 on page 8-33 .
2.) Remove the Right EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-15 on page 8-61 .
3.) Remove the Nest EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-17 on page 8-65
4.) Disconnect the PCI Cable if removing the FEC Assy or HVPS. Otherwise skip this step.
5.) Disconnect RFC connector board if removing RXB or DBF Assy. Otherwise skip this step.
6.) Move the upper and lower board ejector in the direction indicated by the arrow (1) in Figure B.
7.) Pull out the board in the direction indicated by the arrow (2) in Figure B, do not bend it.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
8-94
4-4-4
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-6-2
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
FRU Tests
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 8 8-95
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-1 PCB Boards (FRU No. 601 ~ 605, 608, 609)
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1
2
1
Figure B
SLOT BOARD FRU NO.
1 TXB 601
2
4
RXB
DBF
602
603
5
6
-
-
FEC
HVPS
RFC
PCI
Cable
604
605
608
609
RFC2
RXB
TXB
RFC
CWD
DBF
FEC
PCI Cable From PC to FEC
HVPS
Figure 8-49 PCB Boards Disassembly
8-96 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Connector Board Assy (FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White
NOTE: For LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT, refer to 8-6-3 "Connector Board Assy (FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3
EXPERT" on page 8-99
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Conn. Board Assy.
8-6-2-1
8-6-2-2
8-6-2-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-6-2-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
An electronic discharge may damage a component. Turn OFF power and wear the wrist strap before you remove circuit boards. Do not unplug the power cord to keep ground continuity.
8-6-2-5
8-6-2-6
Do not bend or flex the boards when mounting/dismounting each boards. Surface mount IC boards are very susceptible to damage from flex/torque.
Refer to Figure 8-50 on page 8-98 .
1.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No. 301). Refer to section 8-4-2 on page 8-35
2.) Remove the Right Cover (FRU No. 300). Refer to section 8-4-1 on page 8-33
3.) Remove the Front Bumper (FRU No. 303). Refer to section 8-4-4 on page 8-39
4.) Remove the Front Cover (FRU No. 304). Refer to section 8-4-8 on page 8-47
5.) Remove the Front EMI cover. Refer to section 8-4-18 on page 8-67
6.) Unscrew four screws (1-4) from the connector board.
7.) Disconnect connector board assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Chapter 8 8-97
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-6-2
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
FRU Tests
1
2
Figure 8-50 Connector Board Disassembly
3
4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-98 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Connector Board Assy (FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3 EXPERT
NOTE: For LOGIQ™ 3 PRO and LOGIQ™ 3 Black and White, refer to 8-6-2 "Connector Board Assy
(FRU No. 606) for LOGIQ™ 3 PRO/Black and White" on page 8-97
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Conn. Board Assy.
8-6-3-1
8-6-3-2
8-6-3-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-6-3-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
An electronic discharge may damage a component. Turn OFF power and wear the wrist strap before you remove circuit boards. Do not unplug the power cord to keep ground continuity.
8-6-3-5
8-6-3-6
Do not bend or flex the boards when mounting/dismounting each boards. Surface mount IC boards are very susceptible to damage from flex/torque.
Refer to Figure 8-50 on page 8-98 .
1.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No. 301). Refer to section 8-4-2 on page 8-35
2.) Remove the Right Cover (FRU No. 300). Refer to section 8-4-1 on page 8-33
3.) Remove the Front Bumper (FRU No. 303). Refer to section 8-4-4 on page 8-39
4.) Remove the Front Cover (FRU No. 304). Refer to section 8-4-8 on page 8-47
5.) Remove the Front EMI cover. Refer to section 8-4-18 on page 8-67
6.) Unscrew four screws (1-4) from the connector board.
7.) Disconnect connector board assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Chapter 8 8-99
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-6-2
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
FRU Tests
1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
2
3
Figure 8-51 Connector Board Disassembly
4
8-100 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-4 Card Cage with Back Plane Board (FRU No. 607)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Card Cage with Back Plane Board.
8-6-4-1
8-6-4-2
8-6-4-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-6-4-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
An electronic discharge may damage a component. Turn OFF power and wear the wrist strap before you remove circuit boards. Do not unplug the power cord to keep ground continuity.
8-6-4-5
Do not bend or flex the boards when mounting/dismounting each boards. Surface mount IC boards are very susceptible to damage from flex/torque.
1.) Remove the Connector Board (FRU No.606). Refer to section 8-6-2 on page 8-97 .
2.) Remove the all Boards from the Card Cage (FRU NO. 601 to 605).
3.) Remove LVPS (FRU No. 801). Refer to section 8-7-2 on page 8-121
4.) Disconnect all cable connected to the Backplane.
5.) Remove three screws (a, b, c) and four screws (1-4)
6.) Slide the Card cage to Right & Pull forward to remove the Card Cage with Backplane.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
a b c
Figure 8-52 Card Cage with Backplane
Chapter 8 8-101
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-4-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-6-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
FRU Tests
8-102 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-5 BEP Assy (FRU No. 700)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Back End Processor (BEP) Assy.
8-6-5-1
8-6-5-2
8-6-5-3
8-6-5-4
8-6-5-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Unscrew four screws (1-4) to remove Rear Support Bracket
5.) Remove all Cables from the PC Rear Panel
6.) Unscrew 3 screws (a,b,c) from the PC Support Bracket
7.) Pull Forward to remove the BEP Assy.
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
1
2
Rear Left
Support
Bracket
3
4
Figure 8-53 BEP Assy
a
PC Support Bracket
b
Chapter 8
c
8-103
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-5-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics
8-104 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-5 BEP Assy (FRU No. 700)
(cont’d)
8-6-5-7 BEP Assy Cable Identification
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-54 BEP Cable Identification
CAUTION
BEP Assy contains battery above the ATX Power supply. Handle With care during Service &
Replacements.
Disposal of Battery should follow local Environment Guidelines.
Chapter 8 8-105
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-6
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Hard Disc Drive (FRU no. 701)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Parts in the Back End Processor (BEP)
Assy.
8-6-6-1
8-6-6-2
8-6-6-3
8-6-6-4
8-6-6-5
8-6-6-6
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Remove the BEP (FRU 700). Refer to 8-6-5 on page 8-103
5.) Pull out the BEP Assy and place it on a flat surface.
6.) Unscrew the seven screws (1-7) and remove the side cover.
7.) Remove the FRC and the Power cable to the HDD (a, b) and the two screws (8, 9).
8.) Slide out the HDD mounting.
9.) Remove the two screws marked(10, 11 and 12, 13) on each side of the HDD mounting and remove the HDD.
10.)Replace this HDD.
Mounting Procedure
1.) Replace the parts in the order of removal
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
8-106
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
7-5-2 PC Diagnostics
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 8 8-107
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
.8-6-5 Hard Disk Drive (FRU no. 702)
(contd.)
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10
11
12
13
8-108
8
9
Figure 8-55 HDD Replacement
Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-7
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Compact Disc Read Write Drive (FRU no. 702)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Parts in the Back End Processor (BEP)
Assy.
8-6-7-1
8-6-7-2
8-6-7-3
8-6-7-4
8-6-7-5
8-6-7-6
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Remove the BEP (FRU 700). Refer to 8-6-5 on page 8-103
5.) Pull out the BEP Assy and place it on a flat surface.
6.) Unscrew the seven screws (1-7) and remove the side cover.
7.) Remove the FRC and Power Cable to the CDRW (a, b).
8.) Unscrew the four screws (8-11) connecting the CDRW to the BEP cabinet.
9.) Pull forward and replace the CDRW.
Mounting Procedure
1.) Replace the parts in the order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-5-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
PC Diagnostics
Chapter 8 8-109
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1 2
3
7
6
5
4
LOGIQ™ 3 S a, b
ERVICE
Figure 8-56 CDRW Replacement
8
10
11
9
M
ANUAL
8-110 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-8
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
BEP Power Supply (FRU no. 703)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Parts in the Back End Processor (BEP)
Assy.
8-6-8-1
8-6-8-2
8-6-8-3
8-6-8-4
8-6-8-5
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Remove the BEP (FRU 700). Refer to 8-6-5 on page 8-103
5.) Pull out the BEP Assy and place it on a flat surface.
6.) Unscrew the seven screws (1-7) and remove the side cover.
7.) Remove the cable connections as shown in the figures.
8.) Remove the BEP Front cover by removing the four indicated screws (8-11).
9.) Remove the cable from the cable clamp (a)
10.)Remove the seven screws, marked (12-18), attaching the power supply to the BEP and the four screws (19-22) attaching the battery to BEP.
11.)Replace the power supply and the battery.
Mounting Procedure
1.) Replace the parts in the order of removal.
Chapter 8 8-111
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
2.) If replacement is done on BEP Ver1, close the PCI slot at the rear of the BEP.
9
8
2
3
1
4
10
11
5
6
7 a
This arrangement
is for BEP Ver 2/3. only
This arrangement is for BEP Ver2
/3 only
12
This arrangement is for
BEP Ver 1 only.
15
14
13
8-112
16
19, 20
21, 22
18
17
Slide out the battery as shown
Figure 8-57 BEP Power Supply Replacement
Section 8-6 - PCB
Slide out the Power supply as shown
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-8-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-8 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Leakage Current
8-6-9
8-6-9-1
8-6-9-2
8-6-9-3
8-6-9-4
8-6-9-5
PCVIC PCB (FRU no. 704)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Parts in the Back End Processor (BEP)
Assy.
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Remove the BEP (FRU 700). Refer to 8-6-5 on page 8-103
5.) Pull out the BEP Assy and place it on a flat surface.
6.) Unscrew the seven screws (1-7) and remove the side cover.
7.) Unscrew the screw (8) of the PCVIC attaching it to the BEP.
8.) Remove the cables marked connecting to the PCVIC. Pull out the PCVIC.
9.) Replace this PCVIC using the new PCVIC
Mounting Procedure
1.) Replace the parts in the order of removal.
Chapter 8 8-113
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-9-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
7-6-2
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
FRU Tests
8-114 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1 2
3
7
6
5
4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8
Figure 8-58 PCVIC Replacement
Chapter 8 8-115
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-6-10
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
PC2IP PCB (FRU no. 706)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Parts in the Back End Processor (BEP)
Assy.
8-6-10-1
8-6-10-2
8-6-10-3
8-6-10-4
8-6-10-5
8-6-10-6
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 8-53 on page 8-103 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to 8-4-16 on page 8-63 .
3.) Remove the Left Cover (FRU No.301). Refer to 8-4-2 on page 8-35
4.) Remove the BEP (FRU 700). Refer to 8-6-5 on page 8-103
5.) Pull out the BEP Assy and place it on a flat surface.
6.) Unscrew the seven screws (1-7) and remove the side cover.
7.) Unscrew the screw (8) and remove the cables marked. Pull out the PC2IP Card.
8.) Replace the PC2IP Card.
Mounting Procedure
1.) Replace the parts in the order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-6-10 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
8-116 Section 8-6 - PCB
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
1
2 3
7
6
5
4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8
Figure 8-59 PC2IP Replacement
Chapter 8 8-117
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-7
Power Block
8-7-1
8-7-1-1
8-7-1-2
8-7-1-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Transformer Assy (FRU No. 800)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Transformer Assy.
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-1-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-60 on page 8-120 .
1.) Remove Rear cover (FRU No. 302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37
2.) Position the caster wheel straight
3.) Unscrew two screws (a,b)
4.) Remove GND cable(1)
5.) Remove two screws from the stopper plate
6.) Disconnect Cable Assy 13.
7.) Pull & Remove the Transformer Assy.
NOTICE
Replace Circuit Breaker and Noise Filter in case of transformer failure
Refer Disassy procedure of Circuit Breaker and noise filter.
8-7-1-5
8-7-1-6
Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-1 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
8-118 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Leakage Current
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Chapter 8 8-119
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-1 Transformer Assy (FRU No. 800)
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CA13
1
Stopper plate & two Screws
a b
Transformer
Figure 8-60 Transformer Assy Disassembly
8-120 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-2 LVPS Disassy (FRU No. 801)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the LVPS.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-7-2-1
8-7-2-2
8-7-2-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-2-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-61 on page 8-122 .
1.) Remove Right Cover (FRU No. 300). Refer to section 8-4-1 on page 8-33
2.) Remove Right EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-15 on page 8-61
3.) Unscrew two screws (a,b).
4.) Remove two GND Wire (A, B) and disconnect Connectors 301 and 302.
5.) Disconnect the cables from the backplane. (CN36, CN29, CN31 and CN34).
6.) Disconnect from RPI to LVPS
7.) Slide out the LVPS.
Chapter 8 8-121
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-2-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
a b
A
B
8-7-2-6
Connectors
301 and 302
Figure 8-61 LVPS Replacement
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-2 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Leakage Current
8-122 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-3 AC Interface Board (ACI) (FRU No. 802)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the ACI Board.
8-7-3-1
8-7-3-2
8-7-3-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 persons, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-3-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-62 on page 8-124 .
1.) Remove the Rear Cover (FRU No.302). Refer to section 8-4-3 on page 8-37 .
2.) Remove the Right Cover (FRU No. 300). Refer to section 8-4-1 on page 8-33
3.) Remove the Rear EMI Cover. Refer to section 8-4-16 on page 8-63
4.) Remove Rear Right Support by removing four Screws (a, b, c, d)
5.) Disconnect eight cables (A - H)
6.) Unscrew eight screws (1-8)
7.) Remove the ACI Board.
Chapter 8 8-123
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-3-5 Mounting procedure
Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL b a
A
D
E
B
C
H
G
1
2
3
c
F
4
d
8-7-3-6
Figure 8-62 ACI Board Disassembly
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-3 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Leakage Current
8
7
6
5
8-124 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-4 Fuse (FRU No. 803)
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Fuse.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-7-4-1
8-7-4-2
8-7-4-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-4-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-63 on page 8-125 .
1.) Remove Transformer Assembly (FRU No. 800). Refer to Section 8-7-1 on page 8-118
2.) Pull two cables (a, b).
3.) Press the Fuse in the Direction shown by two arrows and pull the Fuse out.
8-7-4-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
b a
F1
8-7-4-6
Figure 8-63 Fuse Disassembly
Functional Checkout Procedure
See Section
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Chapter 8 8-125
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
4-3-1
4-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-4 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
8-126 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-5 Circuit Breaker (FRU No. 804)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Circuit Breaker.
8-7-5-1
8-7-5-2
8-7-5-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-5-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-64 on page 8-127 .
1.) Remove Transformer Assembly (FRU No. 800). Refer to Section 8-7-1 on page 8-118
2.) Pull four cables (a, b, c, d). Cable a,b is light blue in color and Cable c,d is brown in color
3.) Unscrew four screws (1-4)
4.) Remove Circuit Breaker.
8-7-5-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal
d a b c
1
2
Figure 8-64 Circuit Breaker Disassembly
3
CAUTION
Do not Interchange input (line) to output (load) cables.
Cables a, d from Terminal block (Input) and Cables b,c to Noise Filter (Output).
4
Chapter 8 8-127
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-5-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
10-6-4, 10-6-5
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-5 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
Leakage Current
8-128 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-6 Noise Filter(FRU No. 805)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the Circuit Breaker.
8-7-6-1
8-7-6-2
8-7-6-3
Tools
• Common Phillips screwdrivers
Needed Manpower
• 1 person, 15 minutes + travel
Preparations
• Shut Down the System and switch off the Main Breaker at the rear as described in 4-3-1-3 on page
4-4
8-7-6-4 Removal Procedure
CAUTION
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.
Refer to Figure 8-64 on page 8-127 .
1.) Remove Transformer Assembly (FRU No. 800). Refer to Section 8-7-1 on page 8-118
2.) Remove the 3 screws marked as “a, b, c” as seen in Figure 8-65 on page 8-129
8-7-6-5 Mounting procedure
1.) Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal b c a
Figure 8-65 Noise Filter Disassembly
CAUTION
Do not Interchange input (line) to output (load) cables.
Cables a, d from Terminal block (Input) and Cables b,c to Noise Filter (Output).
Chapter 8 8-129
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-7-6-6 Functional Checkout Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
See Section
4-3-1
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-4-3
4-4-4
4-4-5
4-4-6
4-4-7
Functional and/or
Leakage Current
Test Debrief Script
Power On/Boot Up
Service Manual Direction 5122546-100, Section 8-7-6 . Equipment passes all required tests and is ready for use.
Basic Controls
B Mode Checks
M Mode Checks
Color Flow Mode
Checks
Doppler Mode
Checks
Measurement and
Multi Image Checks
Basic
Measurements
8-130 Section 8-7 - Power Block
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-8
Software Loading Procedure
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-8-1 Installing Base System Software and Application Software
8-8-1-1 General
This describes a full system software loading (Windows 2000 Operating System + Echoloader
Application) procedure.
Use this instructions when:
-
-
Performing the System Version-up (OS + Application)
Replacing the HDD with a new one (OS + Application)
CAUTION
Make sure that all images have been reconstructed and archived on the CD-R or MOD before performing Base System Software (OS) and Application software installation (Refer to Operator
Manual). This procedure will re-initialize the hard disk, erasing all images and patient data.
A Software Loading procedure is outlined:
Table 8-2 Software Loading Procedures
Prerequisite
Manpower
(Approximately.)
1
2
Procedures
Saving the Data (Using Utility Function)
Saving the Data (Using Window Explorer)
Checking PC Box Type
a Blank CD-R or MOD 15 minutes
5 minutes
3
4
5
6
Installing Base System Software (For Adapted/
XXXXXXX or later)
Installing Application Software
Restoring the Data
Functional Checks
Total Manpower
None
LOGIQ3 Base System
Software Load Image CD-
ROM
LOGIQ3 Application Software
CD-ROM
None
None
40 minutes
20 minutes
10 minutes
30 minutes
2 h or 2h20m
NOTICE
The “Saving the Data” procedure described above does NOT include the image back-up procedures.
Chapter 8 8-131
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-8-1-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
Saving the Data (Using Utility Function)
Always use this back-up procedure.
1.) Format CD-R: a.) On the scan screen, touch Utility. The OPERATOR LOGIN window appears.
b.) Change the User level to Admin, then enter Password. Then click on Log on.
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-1 Operator LOGIN window
c.) Select Admin > Connectivity > Tools. d.) Insert a blank CD-R into the drive.
e.) Type a proper label name (e.x. 011201data), then click on Format. f.) The warning message appears. Click on OK. The formatting procedure starts.
2.) Saving the user data: a.) Select Admin > Backup. b.) Check the mark at the followings
8-132 Section 8-8 - Software Loading Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-66 Backup Screen
c.) Click on Backup Now. d.) The warning message appears. Click on OK. The back-up procedure starts.
e.) Verify that “Finished, OK” appears in the Result column. f.) Press the eject button of the drive to eject the CD-R.
g.) Write down the comment (e.x. 011201 data) on the surface of the CD-R using a soft felt-tip pen.
Chapter 8 8-133
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
3.) Write down the following parameters: a.) Select Admin > Connectivity > tcpip.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-67 TCPIP Screen
b.) Write down the followings:
Table 8-3 Writing Down the TCPIP Parameters
Items
Computer Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
4.) Power OFF the scanner.
5.) The System Exit window appears. Click on Shut down...
Parameters
8-134 Section 8-8 - Software Loading Procedure
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-9
Base Load Software Load
8-9-1
8-9-2
8-9-3
8-9-4
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Manpower
One person,.5 hour + travel
Tools
None
Preparations
1.) Back up any customer preset configurations if necessary.
2.) Export and patient exam files if necessary.
Base Load Software Load Procedure
While we do not believe it is necessary, It would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers.
1.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image” into the CDROM drive.
2.) Properly Turn Off the scanner. If necessary, hold down the button until the light goes amber.
Figure 8-68 Shutdown Dialog Box
3.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 10 minutes).
A message will be displayed when the process is complete.
Chapter 8 8-135
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-4 Base Load Software Load Procedure
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Figure 8-69 Base
4.) Remove the CD-ROM
Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System
Software Load process.
5.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, properly turn off the scanner.
6.) Turn the scanner back on. It will now boot up and automatically log on (Base Load -10 or later) to start checking hardware and mapping disk drives. This is a normal and should be allowed to run to completion.
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen.
Wait for the "System Settings Change"dialog box "Restart computer now"
(approximately 3 minutes after the desktop). Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. PATIENCE! The process takes 3-4 minutes. Wait for the "Restart computer now" message to appear before activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel controls.
7.) When you get a message to reboot Windows, wait 15 seconds or until the hour glass disappears and select YES.
8-136 Section 8-9 - Base Load Software Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-5
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Manual Drive Remapping
Although the Base System Image Software Load is automatic, if the drive remapping is not accomplished properly, the changes can be done manually.
Follow the instructions in “ 8-9-11 "Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive
Letters" on page 8-141 to check the drive mapping. If the mapping is not correct, complete the procedure.
8-9-6 Optional Manual Configurations
The Base Image Software Load is automatic. However, there are two configurations of LOGIQ 3 Back
End Processors. On older or clinical systems you may need to perform some checks and windows may request that you perform certain actions. These checks and actions are described below.
Any time you get a request to reboot Windows click OK, and let Windows reboot.
Check Sound Card Configuration
Follow the instructions in 8-9-10 "Optional Check Devices" on page 8-139 .
8-9-7
8-9-8
Loading Applications Software
-
.
Follow the instructions in “ Section 8-10 "Loading Application Software After a Base Image
Load" on page 8-146 .
Final System Setup
Follow the instructions in “ 8-9-8 "Final System Setup" on page 8-137 ” procedure.
Chapter 8 8-137
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-9
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
serialno.txt File Creation
With the exception of Demo Systems, if the system serial number is not set correctly the authorized options installed on the customer systems will not function.
Prior to the upgrade there is no way for the systems in the field to record the serial number of the system to the backplane. The C:\serialno.txt on the hard drive has been used to record the system serial number up to now.
As part of this FMI the backplane storage code is now available. After an Applications Software
Upgrade, when the system is powered up, the serialno.txt file will be read from the hard drive and written to the backplane. This will all work well unless:
-
-
A system Base Image Software was performed. In this case the serialno.txt file must be created and put back on the "C" drive.
* Boot up the system with the service dongle attached to the USB port.
* It will boot up into Windows.
* Go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Notepad. Use Windows Notepad and type in the serial number of the system. Exactly as it is on the console rating plate. (i.e. 57493US2)
* Check the save path for this text file. Save the file directly to the "C:\" drive as file name
serialno.txt. It will NOT function if saved in any other location.
There may be a rare case where the serialno.txt file does not contain the correct system serial number. If this is the case, repeat the previous steps to edit the serialno.txt file to the proper serial number,
NOTE: If there is any doubt about the contents of serialno.txt, it should be checked before the application is first run, as once the serial number is written into the backplane it can only be changed with a diagnostic.
The serialno.txt file writes it’s information into the Backplane EEPROM. You must use the diagnostic utility to enter the Console Serial Number in the EEP-BP VPD Data.txt file.
8-138 Section 8-9 - Base Load Software Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-10
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Check Devices
1.) On the desktop, right click on the MY COMPUTER icon, and select PROPERTIES.
2.) Select the Hardware tab, and then the DEVICE MANAGER. It may take up to a minute for the
Device Manager screen to appear.
Figure 8-70 System Properties
Chapter 8 8-139
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-10
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Check Devices
(cont’d)
3.) Verify that the Device Manager appears as shown in Figure 8-71 . Your display may vary.
4.) You should see no devices with question marks or other icons, except the VIA PCI Audio
Controller (WDM). This one device will be shown as below with a red
X
through it.
5.) There are two audio controllers. The VIA PCI Audio Controller (WDM) is disabled so that the
Doppler audio works correctly through the Creative Labs SB Live series sound card.
Close Window
8-140
Figure 8-71 Device Manager
6.) Close the Device Manager window by selecting the close window X in the corner.
7.) Close the System Properties window by selecting the close window X in the corner.
Section 8-9 - Base Load Software Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
An automated process was developed for this. It was implemented in Base Image Load -9 or later.
NOTE: If you are using a Base Image Load of -8 or earlier, or the -9 and later Base Image Load fails to properly map the drives, prodeed with manually assigning the proper drive letters.
First check to see if you need to change the drive letters on the CDROM drive and the Magneto Optical drives – they SHOULD be G: and H: respectively.
Right-click on the “My Computer” icon on the Windows desktop. Select “Manage” you should see a screen like Figure 8-72 .
Figure 8-72 Computer Management
Click on the “Disk Management” icon on the left side of the screen under “Storage”. You’ll see this screen like Figure 8-73 .
Chapter 8 8-141
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
(cont’d)
Figure 8-73 Disk Management
Notice that “Disk 1 Removable” is shown as drive letter “G:” and “CD-ROM 0” is shown as drive letter
“H:” - These are incorrect drive letters. This procedure will show you how to change them to the proper designations which is the reverse of how they are now.
Left-click on the “Disk 1 Removable” and select “Change Drive Letter and Path…”. You’ll see a screen as shown in Figure 8-74 .
8-142 Section 8-9 - Base Load Software Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
(cont’d)
Figure 8-74 Change Drive Letter and Path
Right-click on “Edit…” and you’ll see a screen as shown in Figure 8-75.
Figure 8-75 Select Drive to Assign
Now Right-click on the little down arrow and you’ll see the list box open with a list of available drive letters. Select the letter “I:”
Chapter 8 8-143
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
(cont’d)
Figure 8-76 Select Drive Letter I
Now Right-click “OK”. You’ll see the following message as shown in Figure 8-77 .
Figure 8-77 Confirm Drive Letter Change
Right-click “OK” to acknowledge the message.
Now follow the previous steps again and change the “CD-ROM 0” to “G:”.
Follow the previous steps one more time to change the “Disk 1 Removable” to “H:”.
When you’re all done the settings should look like those shown in Figure 8-78 .
8-144 Section 8-9 - Base Load Software Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
(cont’d)
Figure 8-78 Confirm Drive Letter Assignment
Congratulations! You’ve just successfully re-mapped the drive letters of the CDROM drive and Magneto
Optical drive to their proper configuration.
Chapter 8 8-145
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-10
Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
8-10-1
8-10-2
8-10-3
8-10-4
8-10-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Manpower
One person, 0.5 hour + travel
Tools
None
Preparations
Loading applications software is necessary after a Base Image Software Load.
If this is the first time for loading Applicatiopns Software (after a Base Image Load) proceed with the following process.
If this is NOT the first time for loading Applications software (just an applications update) then proceed to Section 8-10 "Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load" on page 8-146 .
Image Management Guide
Save As to View on any PC - Use this to save images (Dicom or Raw Dicom) in a computer-friendly format (.avi or .jpeg) so you can view it on any PC.
Move Images to Archive - Use this to take images off your Ultrasound system on to removable media for long-term archive. This is the way to free up hard disk space, rather than deleting images.
Export/Import Data/Images Between Systems - Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from one system to another.
Save As (Saving Images to CD-ROM to View on Any PC)
To save images to the CD-ROM:
1.) Insert the CD.
2.) Go to Utility --> Connectivity --> Tools. Select the Media as CD Rewritable.
3.) Press Format to format the CD-ROM.
4.) Select the image(s) to be saved to CD-ROM, press Menu, and select Save As.
5.) The SAVE AS menu appears.
8-146 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-1
Save As (Saving Images to CD-ROM to View on Any PC) (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-79 Save As Menu
6.) Specify Compression and Save As Type and press Save. The image is saved to the CD-ROM.
7.) When you have put all the images you want on the CD, press F3 to eject the CD-ROM. Select
CD Rewritable.
Figure 8-80 Eject Media Menu
8.) Finalize the CD-ROM by selecting Yes. The CD-ROM is ejected from the system.
Figure 8-81 Finalize CD-ROM Menu
Storing Images with More Resolution
To store images with more resolution than is available with the JPEG selection, select Save As and select AVI as the Save As Type. You can save single images as .avi files.
Chapter 8 8-147
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-1
Save As (Saving Images to CD-ROM to View on Any PC) (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-10-4-2
Table 8-4 Higher Resolution Store Options
Image Type
CINE Loop
Still Image
Store as Image Only Store as Secondary Capture
Gives you a loop of just the image (no title bar and scan information).
Gives you a single image of the video area.
DO NOT DO THIS BECAUSE YOU DO
NOT KNOW WHICH IMAGE FROM THE
LOOP THAT YOU ARE GETTING.
Gives you a single image (no title bar and scan information).
Gives you a single image of the video area.
Moving Images (Image Archive)
To archive images:
1.) Insert the backup media. Format the backup media, CD-ROM or MOD. Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select Connectivity, then Tools. You MUST set up a protocol for locating images on the media by labeling it consistently. The best way is to label images by date.
8-148
Figure 8-82 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen
2.) Format the MOD/CD-ROM.
3.) Press Patient. Set the Dataflow to store images directly to MOD or CD-ROM - or select the
Dataflow tab and select the Removable MOD or Removable CD-ROM dataflow.
Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-2
Moving Images (Image Archive) (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
4.) Press More, then select Move Images. The Move Images pop-up appears.
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-83 Image Archive Move Pop-up Menu
5.) Fill in the From Date, then press Recalculate. Specify to Keep days together. Check that you have enough disk space for the images you want to move. Select Move Images, then press
OK. An in-progress message appears. The archive operation is complete when you receive this message.
Figure 8-84 Archive Operation Complete Message
Chapter 8 8-149
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-3 Export/Import (Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
To move exams from one Ultrasound system to another, you need to export/import exam information.
NOTE: Both database information and images are exported. No data is deleted from the local archive when exporting data.
Exporting Data
To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system:
1.) Format the removable media (MOD or CD-ROM). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/
OK to the messages.
2.) Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen.
Press More (located at the lower, right-hand corner of the Patient menu).
3.) Select Export. Specify the type of removable media (MOD or CD-ROM) on the Export pop-up.
Press OK. Then, please wait until the Patient menu is visible.
Figure 8-85 Export Pop-up Message
4.) In the patient list at the bottom of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export.
You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient.
To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names.
To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc.
You can also search for patients via the Search key and string.
Or, Select All from the Select All/Copy Patient Menu:
8-150 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-3
Export/Import (Moving Data Between Ultrasound Systems) (cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-86 Select All/Copy Patient Menu
NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients’ images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time.
5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Copy Patient from the Select All/
Copy Patient Menu.
6.) Informational status messages appear as the copy is taking place. A final status report pop-up message appears. Press OK.
Figure 8-87 Export Completion Status Message
7.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM.
Chapter 8 8-151
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-4-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Importing Data
To import an exam(s) to another Ultrasound system:
1.) At the other Ultrasound system, insert the MOD or CD-ROM.
2.) Press Patient, press More, then Import. The Import from pop-up message appears. Press OK.
Figure 8-88 Import Pop-up Message
3.) The Patient menu just shows the patients available for import from the removable media you just loaded onto the system.
4.) Select the patients to be imported.
5.) Press Copy Patient from the Select All/Copy Patient menu.
6.) Please wait for the patient information to be copied to this Ultrasound system. Informational messages appear while the import is taking place.
7.) Press F3 to eject the media.
8-152 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-10-5
Loading Applications Software
1.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM drive.
2.) Move the cursor using Trackball to find the “Start” command button on the Monitor screen
3.) Press the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the Screen and select “Run…”.
Enter “g:\LoadSoftware.bat” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-89 on page 8-153 .
Figure 8-89 Run Load Software
4.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 8-115 on page 8-172 .
Chapter 8 8-153
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-9-11
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Procedure for Changing (Re-mapping) Drive Letters
(cont’d)
Figure 8-90 Application CD Installation Popup
5.) Press Y key twice to start the process.
6.) During Application Software loading process, the System will auto Shutdown.Manually switch on the System using the ‘standby- ON/OFF’ switch.
7.) After the software loading is completed, the system will pop-up a message, asking to make the selection for Presets according to location of site as seen in the Figure 8-116 below. Make the appropriate selection.
Figure 8-91 Preset Selection
8.) Wait until the system shuts down automatically (Approx 5 Minutes to shut down).
9.) Wait for Approx. 15 seconds.
10.)Power on the System and Remove the CD while it boots
11.)The System pops up the Screen asking for Option Key. Enter the Basic Option Key obtained on ordering of the BT’05 Upgrade.
12.)If you didn’t remove the CD, don’t worry you will get a dialog box as in Figure 8-92 .
8-154 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-5-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program)
1.) Make sure that the wrench icon is shown at the bottom of the scan screen. Click on the wrench icon to activate. It will take about ten (10) seconds for activating.
Figure 8-92 Wrench Icon
CAUTION
If the wrench icon is not displayed on the scan screen, the installation of Service Platform had been failed.
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
If the following dialog box is shown on the monitor, select Do not perform this check in the future and click on the Yes button. This dialog box will not be displayed for next time.
If the another dialog box appears on the monitor, follow the instructions of the dialog box to continue the Functional Check procedures.
If Caps Lock Active the display will be highlighted in the screen.
Figure 8-93 Netscape Navigator Window
Chapter 8 8-155
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
2.) The Service Login window for Service Platform will be shown on the monitor display.
Figure 8-94 Service Login Window
CAUTION
If the Login window for Service Platform is not displayed on the monitor, the installation of the
Service Platform has failed.
3.) Select GE Service at the “Select User Level” field.
4.) Enter the password for the Service Platform.
5.) Click on Okay.
Figure 8-95 Selecting User Level
8-156 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
6.) Verify that the following screen (Service Platform) is displayed on the monitor.
7.) Click on x located at the upper right corner of the service platform screen to close the Service
Platform and return to the scan panel.
Figure 8-96 Service Platform Screen
Chapter 8 8-157
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-10-5-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
Restoring the Data
1.) On the scan screen, touch Utility. The OPERATOR LOGIN window appears.
2.) Change the User level to Admin, then enter Password. Then click on Log on.
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-1 Operator LOGIN window
3.) Select Admin > Restore.
4.) Insert the CD-R into which the user parameters have been saved.
5.) Check the mark at the followings:
8-158
Figure 8-97 Restore
6.) Select the source, then click on Restore Now.
7.) The warning message appears. Click on OK. The restore procedure starts.
8.) Verify that “Finished, OK” appears in the Result column.
9.) Press the eject button of the CD-R drive to eject the CD-R.
Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10.)Select Admin > Connectivity > tcpip.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-98 TCPIP Screen
11.)Enter Computer Name, IP Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway which have been written in Chapter 8 - Saving the Data (Using Utility Function).
12.)Click on Save settings.
13.)Click on OK for confirmation dialog box.
Figure 8-99 Confirmation Dialog Box
14.)Touch Scan on the NTPUI to return to the scan screen.
15.)Reboot the system.
16.)On the scan screen, press Patient button and verify that the patient registration screen appears
Chapter 8 8-159
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
17.)with no error.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8-10-5-3
Figure 8-100 Patient Registration Screen
Functional Checks for Probe Recognition
1.) Touch Scan button on the NTPUI to return to the scan screen.
2.) Connect each probe to ensure that they are recognized.
3.) Check every probe in the following modes and ensure that no artifacts or no problems are found in:
B-mode
-
-
-
Color FLow
Pulsed Doppler
M-mode
8-160 Section 8-10 - Loading Application Software After a Base Image Load
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-11
Installing Option Software
8-11-1
8-11-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preparations
• Option strings (This is a option key with a sequence of letters and numbers. Consult your local OLC how to get it.)
Procedures
1.) Power OFF the scanner to change user login level.
2.) The SYSTEM EXIT window appears. Click on Logoff.
Figure 8-101 System EXIT window
3.) The message window appears. Click on OK.
4.) The OPERATOR LOGIN window appears.
Change the User level to Admin, then enter Password. Then click on Log on.
Figure 8-102 Operator LOGIN window
Chapter 8 8-161
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-11-2 Procedures
(cont’d)
5.) Select Utility > Admin>System Admin.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-103 Utility window
6.) Select System Admin tab, then click on NewEnter Option string into New Key dialogue box. Then verify that:
The option string to be entered appears in the SW Option Key list.
The option appears in the Options list as “Permanent”.
• If an option fails to install, delete it as follows: a.) Click on the option key string to be deleted from the SW Option Key list.
b.) Click on Delete. c.) The warning message appears. Click on OK.
NOTICE
Do NOT delete all SW Option Key. If it does, the system can NOT start up!!
8-162 Section 8-11 - Installing Option Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 8-12
Loading Base and Application Software
A Software Loading procedure is outlined below:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1
S.No
2
3
Procedures
Changing BIOS
Installing Base
System Software
Prerequisites
BEP2,BEP 3
LOGIQ™ 3 Base
System Load Image
CD-ROM
Man Power
5 minutes
Refer
Section 8-12-1
10 minutes Section 8-12-2
Installing Application
Software
LOGIQ3 Application
Software CD-ROM
Table 8-5 Soft ware Loading Procedure
10 minutes Section 8-9-11
Chapter 8 8-163
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-12-1 Making BIOS changes
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1.) During Boot Up, Press F2 to enter SetUp Screen.
2.) Enter the Password as “dhruva”
3.) Under “Exit”,go to the “Load Optimal Default Parameters” and press “Enter” Ref. Figure 8-104 on page 8-164
4.) pop up screen appears on the screen ,Click on OK.
Figure 8-104 Load Optimal Default Settings
5.) Press ESC
8-164 Section 8-12 - Loading Base and Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
6.) Enter “Boot” tab, Under “Boot Disk Priority”,select CD RW as the First Boot device as in Figure
8-105 on page 8-165 and the Hard disk as the Second Boot Device
Figure 8-105 1 st Boot Device CD R/W
7.) Press ESC
Chapter 8 8-165
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
8.) Under “Advanced” --> ”Chipset Configuration” tab, Go To ISA Enable bit . Press Enter and
Select “Disabled”. as in Figure 8-106 on page 8-166
Figure 8-106 Disable ISA bit
9.) Press ‘ESC”
10.)Under “Advanced” --> ”Diskette Configuration” tab, Go To Diskette Controller. Press Enter and
Select “Disabled”. as in Figure 8-107 on page 8-166
Figure 8-107 Disable Diskette Controller
8-166
11.)Press ‘ESC”
12.)Under “Advanced” --> ”USB Configuration” tab, Under “2.0 Legacy Support” ,Set the USB speed to “HiSpeed”
Section 8-12 - Loading Base and Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
13.)Press ESC
14.)Press “F10”.
15.)Popup screen appears on the screen.
16.)Click on “OK” to Save all the changes and exit as per Figure 8-108 on page 8-167
Figure 8-108 Save changes before Exiting BIOS
17.)Reboot the System..
Chapter 8 8-167
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-12-2 Base Software Load Procedure For BEP Ver 2 , 3, and 4
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers, all External Drives (USB
MOD, Flash Sticks, USB Memory etc.,), Switch Off peripherals like printers, VCR, VGP before installing Base Load. If not, this can affect the keyboard functionality after loading the base.
1
SL#
2
3
BEP Part No.
Ghost Part Number Reference
2361975-2 or
2361975-4
BEP Ver2
NA
Software to be used for Base / Application Loading
2361975-7 or
2361975-8
BEP Ver3
5193870
BEP Ver4
NA
NA
Refer Section 9-18 for appropriate Base and
Application softwares
Table 8-6 S/W CD Selection to Begin Load Procedure
1.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image as per BEP Type” into the CDROM drive and switch on the system. The following screen appears, Press any key to Continue.
Figure 8-109 Base Load Warning Message
CAUTION: DO NOT SELECT OPTION 1 as it will delete the patient images on the Hard disk.
2.) SELECT OPTION 2 for C Partition Only.
8-168 Section 8-12 - Loading Base and Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
.
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-110 Base Load Option Message
3.) You will see a screen showing Ghost. This automatically loads the base software onto the hard disk.
Let it run to completion (Approximately 10 mins).
Figure 8-111 Ghost Screen
4.) A message will be displayed when the process is completed.
Figure 8-112 Base Load Completion Message
Chapter 8 8-169
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
5.) Remove the CD-ROM
NOTE:
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System
Software Load process.
This Base software loading has changed the system platform from Windows 2000
Professional to Windows XP.
M
ANUAL
NOTE:
NOTE:
6.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, properly turn off the scanner by pressing and holding power on button on keyboard for more than 20 seconds.
7.) Turn the scanner back on. It will now boot up and automatically log on to start checking hardware and Device Manager. This is a normal and should be allowed to run to completion.
When booting up the first time it could take 30-90 seconds after the login box appears before the trackball and key board are active. Watch for the arrow cursor to appear.
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen.
Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Restart computer now”
(approximately 3 minutes after the desktop).
NOTE:
Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. PATIENCE! The process takes 3-4 minutes. Wait for the “Restart computer now” message to appear before activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel controls.
8.) Wait till you get a windows reboot message. This may take upto 3 minutes. On this message, Click on NO as shown in the Figure 8-113 below.
8-170
Figure 8-113 Windows Restart Screen
Section 8-12 - Loading Base and Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
8-12-3 Loading Applications Software
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM drive.
2.) Move the cursor using Trackball to find the “Start” command button on the Monitor screen
3.) Press the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the Screen and select “Run…”.
4.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware.bat” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-89 on page 8-153 .
Figure 8-114 Run Load Software
5.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 8-115 on page 8-172 .
Chapter 8 8-171
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Loading Applications Software(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 8-115 Application CD Installation Popup
6.) Press Y key twice to start the process.
7.) During Application Software loading process, the System will auto Shutdown.Manually switch on the System using the ‘standby- ON/OFF’ switch.
8.) After the software loading is completed, the system will pop-up a message, asking to make the selection for Presets according to location of site as seen in the Figure 8-116 below. Make the appropriate selection.
NOTE:
Figure 8-116 Preset Selection
9.) Wait until the system shuts down automatically (Approx 5 Minutes to shut down).
10.)Wait for Approx. 15 seconds.
11.)Power on the System and Remove the CD while it boots.
12.)The System pops up the Screen asking for Option Key. Enter the Basic Option Key noted
earlier.
13.)Manually Enter connectivity settings,hospital name,print key settings, TCP/IP settings etc.
14.) After Loading S/ W the Service engineer has to change the date and time in Utilities->System-
>General->Date/Time to customize the system with regional settings.
Do Not restore the application/ imaging presets from 2.x.x to the system after the
Upgrade. Restoring the imaging presets could result in poor image quality.
8-172 Section 8-12 - Loading Base and Application Software
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 9-1
Overview
9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9
This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 3.
Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9
Section
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
Overview
List of Abbreviations
Operator Console Assy
MONITOR
Keyboard
External Covers
Mechanical Assembly’s
I/O Interfaces
PCB Boards
BEP
Power Block
Power Cord
Probes
Peripherals
Cables Set
Option Parts
New FRUs for LOGIQTM3 Expert
Description Page Number
9-17
9-18
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-12
9-14
9-16
9-17
9-6
9-8
9-10
9-11
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-5
Chapter 9 9-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
• Assy - Assembly
• BEP - Back End Processor
• Ctrl - Control
• FEP - Front End Processor
• F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option
• FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub
• FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)
• Int -Internal
• I/O - Input/Output
• PWA - Printed Wire Assembly
• Recv - Receive
• XFRMR - Transformer
9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-3
Operator Console Assy
3
Front View
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Side View
Figure 9-1 Operator Console Assembly
Chapter 9 9-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-3 Operator Console Assy
(cont’d)
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Rear View
Top View
9-4
Figure 9-2 Operator Console Assembly
Section 9-3 - Operator Console Assy
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-4
MONITOR
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
103
104
105
100
102
106
101
Figure 9-3 Monitor FRU’s
Table 9-2 Monitor FRU’s
Item Part Name
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Monitor Assembly
Monitor Cover Left
Monitor Cover Right
Monitor Cover Top
Monitor Cover Front
Monitor Switch Assembly
Task Lamp
Part Number
5308521-2
2320764
2320766
2320762
2320768
2300008
2317347
Chapter 9
Comments
2319551-7 (old),
5308521 (old)
Bezel Assy
Common part with L5
Common part with L5
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-5
Keyboard
200
201
203
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
202
9-6
205
204
208
207
Figure 9-4 Keyboard FRU’s
Section 9-5 - Keyboard
206
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 9-3 Keyboard FRU’s
Item
204
205
206
207
208
200
201
202
203
Part Name
Keyboard Assembly
Probe Holder
Keyboard TGC Assy
Hub PCB Assy
A/N Keyboard Assy
Trackball Assy
Freeze Key Assy
Power Switch & Encoder PCB Assy
Keyboard Power Cable
Part Number
2319549-3
2319638
2320741
2350376
2320751
2317344
2320742
2364732
2364742
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Comments
English Keyboard Assy
Common part with L5
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 9 9-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-6
External Covers
300
301
302
305
306
304
307
309
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
303
308
310
9-8
Figure 9-5 External Covers FRU’s
Section 9-6 - External Covers
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
307
308
309
310
311
303
304
305
306
Table 9-4 External Covers FRU’s
Item
300
301
Part Name
Right Cover Assy
Left Cover Assy
302
Rear Cover Assy
Front Bumper Assy
Front Cover Assy
Top Cover Assy
Keyboard Bottom Cover
Keyboard Bumper
Keyboard Rear Cover Assy
Front Rubber Bumper Left
Front Rubber Bumper Right
Logiq 3 Emblem set
Part Number
2323369
2323368
2367629
2367630
2319621
2367628
2362285
2319628
2319637
2334618
2319631
2319632
5224149
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Comments
Right Cover + Bumper
Left Cover + Bumper
Rear Cover + Bumper for Asia
Rear Cover + Bumper for rest of world
Back Cover
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 9 9-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-7
Mechanical Assembly’s
404
400
403
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
401
Figure 9-6 Mechanical Assembly FRU’s
402
Table 9-5 Mechanical Assembly FRU’s
Item
400
401
402
403
404
405
Part Name
Handle Rod
Front Castor
Rear Castor
Air Filter
Card Cage Fan Assy
Speaker Set
Part Number
2334639
2300021
2300022
2326158
2350375
2319526
9-10 Section 9-7 - Mechanical Assembly’s
Comments
Common with L5
Common with L5
DC Fan Assembly
Qty FRU
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-8
I/O Interfaces
500
501
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
505
504
503
502
Front Panel
Figure 9-7 I/O Interfaces FRU’s
Table 9-6 I/O Interfaces FRU’s
Item Part Name
500
501
502
503
504
505
505
Rear Panel Assembly
RP1 Assembly
RP2 Assembly
Rear Panel Interface Assembly
Front Panel Assembly
Rear Panel Fuse - 3A
Rear Panel Fuse - 5A
Part Number
2319547
2383299
2319486
2319488
2319484-2
2383298
2332968
2361948
Comments
Rear Panel Assy - 230VAC
Rear Panel Assy - 100/115VAC
RPI
Front Panel Assy - 115VAC
3A Fuse
5A Fuse
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
Chapter 9 9-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-9
PCB Boards
601
611603 604
602
605
608
606
609
610
Figure 9-8 PCB Boards FRU’S
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
607
9-12 Section 9-9 - PCB Boards
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 9-7 PCB Boards FRU’s
Item
605
606
606
607
601
602
603
604
608
609
610
611
612
Part Name
Transmit Board Assy
Receive Board
Digital Beam Former Board
Front End Control Board
High Voltage Power Supply
Connector Board
Connector Board
Card cage with Backplane
RFC Assy
PCI Cable
RFC2 Assy
CWD Assy
CWD+BPB+Cardcage Assy
Part Number
2318124-3
2318122-3
5129331-2
5137896-2
2390954-3
5123265
2318128-2
2328381-3
2319480
2363523
2379706
2401834
2405514
LOGIQ™ 3 S
Comments
TXB
RXB
DBF
FEC2 FRU Assembly with software
HVPS
3 Probe Port Connector Bord
2 Probe Port Connector Board
Cardcage + Backplane Board
RFC
Common Part with L5
This is a combination of FRU 607 and 611
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 9 9-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-10
BEP
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Caution:
:
703
700
704
705
Figure 9-9 PC Block FRU’s
702
701
9-14 Section 9-10 - BEP
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 9-8 PC Block FRU’s
Item Part Name
BEP3 Assy for S/W 2.X.X
BEP3 Assy for S/W 4.0.X
700
BEP4 FRU Assy for S/W 4.1.X
701
702
703
704
HDD for S/W 4.X.X
CDRW For BEP 2 - 48x24x48
LG Drive: CDRW
Nipron Power Supply for BEP2,BEP3, and BEP4
PCVIC PCB
PC2IP PCB for R2.X.X or R4.X.X
705
PC2IP2 PCB for R2.X.X or R4.X.X
PC2IP3 PCB For R4.X.X
Part Number
5126610-2
2361975-8
5220185
5138280
2381159
2399547-2
2399007
2393280
FB200973, and
FC200617
FB200312, and
FC200656
5220187
Description
Back End Processor Assy
Back End Processor Assy
Back End Processor Assembly 5191287 with USB extender cable 5196002
1
PC2IP3(FC200755) with R4.1.X base and application spftware
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CAUTION
BEP contains battery above the ATX Power supply. Handle With care during Service &
Replacements.
Disposal of Battery should follow local Environment Guidelines.
Chapter 9 9-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-11
Power Block
800
802
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
803
801
Circuit Breaker
804
Figure 9-10 Power Block FRU’s
Table 9-9 Power Block FRU’s
Item
800
801
802
803
804
805
Part Name
Transformer Assy
LVPS
ACI Assembly
Transformer Fuse
Circuit Breake and Guardr
Noise Filter
Part Number
2406958
2319545-2
2319490-2
2361948
2405517
2319501
Description
Transformer Assy
Low Voltage Power Supply
AC Interface Board
.
NOTICE
Replace Circuit Breaker and Noise Filter in case of transformer failure
Refer Disassy procedure of Circuit Breaker and noise filter.
9-16 Section 9-11 - Power Block
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-12
Power Cord
Table 9-10 Power Cord
Item
900
901
902
903
904
Part Name
Power Cord Assy
Power Cord Assy
Power Cord Assy
Power Cord Assy
Power Cord Assy
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Part Number
2365878
2343034
2342033
2334499
5137225
Description
Power Cord - Japan
Power Cord - India
Power Cord - Europe
Power Cord - USA
POWER CORD - CHINESE 230V WITH CCC MARK
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Section 9-13
Probes
Table 9-11 Probes
1008
1009
1010
1011
Item
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
Part Name
3C
5C
E8C
10LB
3S
3.5C
7S
10L*
12L Probe*
8C Probe*
BE9C*
8L**
NOTE:
Part Number
2286354
2294516
2294641
2253846
2323337
2296158
2263669
2294523
2295377
2348094
2389382
5140738
* Indicates Probe Exclusive to LOGIQ 3 EXPERT
Description
Convex Probe
Convex Probe
Micro Convex Probe
Linear Probe
Sector Probe
Convex Probe
Sector Probe
Linear Probe
Linear Probe
Convex Probe
Convex Probe
Linear
1
1
1
1
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1 2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 9 9-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-14
Peripherals
Table 9-12 Peripherals
Item
1104
1105
1106
1107
1100
1101
1102
1103
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1117
1118
1119
1120
1113
1114
1115
1116
1121
1122
Part Name
SVO-9500MD
SVO-9500MDP
AG-MD835P
AG-MD835E
UP-895MDW
UP- UPD895 USB
Model P91W
UP-21MD
UP-21MD USB
UP-23MD USB
CP-900UM
UP-51MD
HP 990CXi
HP 6122
HP 5652
CP-900E
CP-CP-900DW
256MB USB 2.0 Flash memory
512MB USB 2.0 Flash memory
UP-897MDW
UP-D897MD
P93DW
HP K550
Section 9-15
Cables Set
Part Number
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Local
Table 9-13 Cables Set - 2367627
Item
1200
Part Name
Cable Set
Part Number
2367627
9-18 Section 9-14 - Peripherals
Description
Sony VCR
Sony VCR
Panasonic VCR
Panasonic VCR
Sony B/W Printer
Sony B/W Printer
Mitsubishi B&W Printer
Sony Color Printer
Sony Color Printer
Sony Color Printer
Mitsubishi Color Printer
Sony Color Printer
HP PC Printer
HP PC Printer
HP PC Printer
Mitsubishi Color Printer
Mitsubishi Color Printer
Transcend-JetFlashTS256M
Kingston-Data traveller 2.0
Sony B/W Printer
Sony B/W Printer
Mitsubishi B&W Printer
HP Office PRO
Description
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Qty FRU
1 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-16
Option Parts
Table 9-14 Option Parts
Item
1304
1305
1306
1307
1300
1301
1302
1303
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
Part Name
ECG Cable Hook
ECG Cable Assembly 37
Cable Set for B/W Printer
Cable Set for B/W Digital Printer
Cable Set for Analog Color Printer
Cable Set for Digital Color Printer
Cable Set for Sony VCR
Cable Set for Panasonic VCR
VGP Tray for Logiq 3
VGP Tray Cover for Logiq 3
Color Printer Mounting Plate - A
Color Printer Mounting Plate - B
VCR Mounting Tray for Logiq 3
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1317
1318
1319
1320
1313
VCR Mounting Tray Bracket for Logiq 3
1314
Global Modem Kit
1315
1316
ECG Patient I/O Module
THI Board
Additional Probe port Adapter
Foot Switch for Logiq 3
MOD Top Mounting Plate
MOD Bottom Mounting Plate
MOD for Logiq 3
MOD Power Supply
Russian Language Kit
Greek Langyage Kit
PGC Microphone for Logiq 3
Cable ECG Marquette IEC
Leadwires ECG Marquette IEC
Part Number
2283028
2319535
2369943
2367622
2369944
2367621
2367618
2367620
2334260
2352823
2377612
2377613
2380864
2380866
2245794
FA200801
2288838-2
2334993
FB200952
2380861
2380862
2384284
2384285
2331768
2331769
2326844
164L0026
164L0028
Description
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 9 9-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 9-17
New FRUs for LOGIQ
TM
3 Expert
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
1405
1401
1400
1402
9-20
1403
1406
Figure 9-3 LOGIQ3 Expert Fru’s
Section 9-17 - New FRUs for LOGIQTM3 Expert
1404
1407
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
9-17-1 Hardware FRU’s for LOGIQ3 BT’05
Table 9-2 LOGIQ3 BT’05 Hardware FRU’s
Item
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
Part Name
Standard 3 Port connector board
Assembly - Main PCB and Piggy PCB
Main board Assembly for Standard 3 port connector board
Piggy PCB for Standard 3 port
Connector Board Assembly
Logiq 3 BEP3 with 80 GB Hard Disk ,
Additional USB support, PC2IPII Rev 4 and 2.8 GHZ Processor for Software
4.0.X
BEP4 Back End Processor for L3 S/W
4.2.0 with D865GSA
ST380011A SEAGATE 80 GB 7400
RPM HARDDISK FOR LOGIQ 3
Dual Power Dual USB Front Panel - for
Logiq 3
Front-cover-3PP for L3
Front-bumper-3PP for L3
VCR FIXTURE FOR MITSUBISHI-
MD3000
VCR FIXTURE BRACKET FOR
MITSUBISHI-MD3000
Logiq3 BT05 USB cable Asm FRU
Part Number
5123265
5119271
5117473
2361975-8
5220185
5237487
5121498
5116278
5116279
5136090
5136091
5141575
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Description
1401 and 1402 forms 1400 FRU
Qty FRU
1 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Section 9-18Software FRU’s for LOGIQ3 Expert/PRO/Black and White
Table 9-1 Software FRU’s For LOGIQ 3 Expert/PRO/Black and White
Part Number Item Part Name
1411
Logiq 3 Expert BT05 Application Software for software
R4.2.0
1412
Logiq 3 PRO BT05 Application Software for software R4.1.2
1413
1414
Logiq 3 Black and White BT05 Application Software for software R4.1.2
Base Image software for BEP2 with Intel865 Motherboard for Logiq 3 BT05
1415
1416
Base Image software for BEP3 with Intel865 Motherboard for Logiq 3 BT05
Base Image software for BEP4 for Logiq 3 BT05
5133116-4
5140654-4
5140661-3
5120163-2
5120166-3
5193870
Description Qty FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 9 9-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
9-22 Section 9-18 - Software FRU’s for LOGIQ3 Expert/PRO/Black and White
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1
10-1-2
Periodic Maintenance Inspection
It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ 3 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some
Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.
Purpose of Chapter 10
This chapter describes Care & Maintenance (PM) on the scanner and its peripherals. These PM procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before starting a PM.
CONTENTS IN CHAPTER 10
Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10
Section
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
Description
Overview
Why do Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Tools Required
System Maintenance
Electrical Safety Tests
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
PM Inspection Certificate
Page Number
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-4
10-7
10-12
10-28
10-29
CAUTION
Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER
THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,
AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS
STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION
Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
Chapter 10 10-1
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1
10-2-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate(Provided on Page 10-29) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.
Quality Assurance
In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3
Periodic Maintenance Schedule
10-3-1
NOTE:
NOTE:
How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 3 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 3 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an indepth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ 3 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care and Maintenance Task schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 3 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not used as a primary “mobile unit” which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the periodic maintenance frequencies
If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies.
10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Service at Indicated Time
Clean Probes
Clean Probe Holders
Daily
•*
•
Clean Air Filter
Inspect AC Mains Cable
Inspect Cables and Connectors
Clean Console
Clean Monitor
Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and
Swivel Locks
Console Leakage Current Checks
Weekly Monthly Annually Notes
* or before each use
•
•
•
•
•
•
more frequently depending on your environment
Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks
Endocavity Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Surgical Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Measurement Accuracy Checks
Probe/Phantom Checks
•
•
•
•
•
Mobile Unit Check Daily also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance
Twice
Annually
As Prescribed in probe manua l also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance
Chapter 10 10-3
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Standard GE Tool Kit
The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the USA. Not all tools are required for PMs.
Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents
Tool ID
9-GH807
68-412
9-GH130
9-41584
9-4118
9-41293
9-41294
9-41295
9-46677
9-34701
9-43499
9-4355
9-43523
9-43531
9-4518
9-44776
9-44601
9-4151
9-41421
9-41594
9-41581
9-39451
9-45358
9-4078
9-44572
9-44579
9-44579
9-45385
9-45378
9-4518
Description
Pliers Retaining Ring
Scribe
Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16
Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16
Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16
Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch
Pliers, Slip Joint
Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature
Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature
Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc.
Wrench, Adj., 4 inch
Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby
Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip
Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. x 4 in.
Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. x 4 in.
20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load
Ratchet, Offset, Slotted
Ratchet, Offset, Phillips
Tapered Reamer
Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in.X 6 in.
Screwdriver, Phillips #2, Stubby
Screwdriver, Phillips #0
Screwdriver, Phillips #1
Screwdriver, Phillips #2
Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric
1/4 in. Standard.Socket set (19 pc)
1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive
Flex Spinner
Breaker
6 inch Ext.
Tool ID
9-HT62002
9-4099
9-GH3001
9-GH300ME
9-XL9920
9-XL9921
9-XL9922
9-XL9923
9-XL9924
9-XL9925
9-XL9926
9-XL99764
9-XL99964
9-XLM60
9-XL9971MM
9-XL9972MM
9-XL9973MM
9-XL9974MM
9-XL9975MM
9-XL9976MM
9-XL9977MM
9-XL991CM
C2356E
BLBO
DWL4283T
9-41322
9-6757
9-9487
9-45341
9-3001
Description
Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm
Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm
Handle
Screw starter - Kedman Quick Wedge
Box - 18 Compartment
Box - 5 Compartment
Pickup Tool, Claw type
6 pc Needle File Set
Utility Knife
Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch
Xacto Pen Knife
Solder Aid, Fork and Hook
Mirror, Round, Telescoping
Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch
Steel Rule Metric 6 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 5/16 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 3/32 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch
Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64
Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64
Mini-screwdriver kit
10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents (Continued)
Tool ID
9-65283
9-46696
9-39829
9-38461
9-4280
9-WEW60P3
9-WECT5B6
9-WEWDP12
93383
9-GH408
21576
9-4516
Description
Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep
Hex Keys
Torpedo Level, Magnetic
Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz
Universal Joint 1/4 inch
Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire
Weller - Soldering Iron Tip
Weller - Desoldering Pump
Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.)
Tweezers
Brush - Bristle
Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal
Tool ID
9-45072
9-XL100X
9-XL87CG
9-WEWDT-07
9-WS175-E
KH174
KH175
9-Z9480121
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
Description
Pliers 6 inch Diagonal
Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch - 100X
Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG
Weller-Soldering-Replacement Tip(1)
Wiss - Surgical Scissors
Hemostat 5 inch Straight
Hemostat 5 inch curved
Alignment tool (red)
ANUAL
Tool ID
9-45381
9-45092
9-42882
9-42884
9-42886
9-42973
9-GH77
9-GH890
9-31276
9-31277
9-31263
21045C
9-44604
9-41587
9-41586
9-GH19512
9-44741
Table 10-4 Overview of GE-2 Tool Kit Contents
Description
GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034)
Tool ID
Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch
Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch
Punch, Pin 3/32 inch
Punch, Pin 5/32 inch
Punch, Pin 1/4 inch
Cold Chisel 1/2 inch
Center Punch Automatic
File Handle, Adj.
File, Round, Bastard 8 inch
File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch
File, Flat Mill 8 inch
Close Quarter Saw
Wrench, Adj 10 inch
Screwdriver 5/16 inch x 8 inch
Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch
Countersink 1/2 inch
12 PC Combination Wrench Set
9-44067
9-42679
9-44262
9-4258
9-34374
9-44311
9-33485
9-33484
9-33484
9-52068
9-52722
9-52723
9-44046
Description
Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive
Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333)
Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405)
3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter
3/8 inch Metric Socket Set - 12 PT
16mm Socket 12 pt.
Metal Socket Tray
Metal Socket Tray
Metal Socket Tray
Tap and Drill Set
#6 Tap
#8 Tap
High Speed Drill Set
#36 Drill
#29 Drill
3/8 inch Socket Set
Chapter 10 10-5
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-4-2 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
10-4-2-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-5 Overview of Requirements for Periodic Maintenance
Tool
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
Leakage Current Ultrasound Kit
Part Number Comments
Anti Static Kit
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
Air Filter
Safety Analyzer
SVHS VCR Cassette
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner
QIQ Phantom
CD-RW Media
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet
Disposable Gloves
2113015
46–194427P231
46–194427P279
46–194427P369
46–194427P373
46–194427P370
46–194427P278
46–194427P279
See Chapter 9
46–285652G1
E7010GG
E7010GF
E8370RB
For 120V and 220V Units
Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240
V system
3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
3M #3051 conductive ground cord
120V
230V
air intake
DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
60 minute
120 minute
See VCR user manual for requirements
RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS
For LOGIQ™ 3
See printer user manual for requirements
See printer user manual for requirements
10-6 Section 10-4 - Tools Required
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-6 System Checks
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
Ask & Listen
Paperwork
Power up
Probes
Displays
Presets
Description
Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate(see page 10-29). Note all probes and system options.
Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
Verify proper display on the monitor
Backup all customer presets on an CD-R.
Chapter 10 10-7
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-5-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)
The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System Checks
Table 10-7 System Functional Checks
÷ Step Description
B-Mode
CF-Mode
Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
Doppler Modes
Verify basic Doppler operation (PW). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
M-Mode
Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
*Applicable
Software Options
Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D (Option), Harmonics
(Option), Cine, etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.
Probe Elements
Perform an Element Test, on each probe to verify that all probe elements (and system channels) are functional.
System Diagnostic Perform the Automatic Tests, to verify that all boards function according to specifications.
Control Panel Test
Perform the Control Panel Test Procedure, to verify that all keyboard controls are OK. This is performed by the internal PC (backend processor) which does a normal keyboard run through.
Monitor
Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Measurements
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications.
NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-5-2-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Peripheral/Option Checks
If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.
10-5-3
10-5-3-1
10-5-4
10-5-4-1
Table 10-8 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks
6
7
8
Step Item Description
1
2
VCR
Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
B/W Printer
Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 DICOM
Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
5 InSite/iLinq
Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications.
(Warranty & Contract Customers only)
Camera
Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary.
Footswitch
Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
ECG
Verify basic operation with customer
Input Power
Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection
Step
1
2
Item Description
Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
Inspect
Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
3
4
Verify
Verify
Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.
Inlet connector retainer is functional.
Cleaning
General Cleaning
Table 10-10 General Cleaning
Step Item Description
1 Console
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
3 Monitor
TBDFor monitor, use a non-ammonia (just isopropyl and water) lens cleaner. These are available at most computer outlet stores. DO NOT use Windex, Screen-Clean, etc., because these contain ammonia, which will remove the anti-glare coating on the monitor.
Chapter 10 10-9
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning
\
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Table 10-11 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment
Step
1
2
3
Item
Remove Filter
Cover
Description
Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.
Clean Filter
Install Filter
The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter is metal wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic vacuum or replace.
Install the clean filter.
NOTE:
10-5-5
For your convenience or of the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available.
Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.
Physical Inspection
Table 10-12 Physical Checks
Step Item Description
8
9
1
2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3 Control Panel
Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
4
Labeling
Control Panel
Movement
Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable conditionRefer to the User Manual 2300750 for details.
Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that it latches in position as required.
5
6
7
10
Wheels & Brakes
Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper operation.
Cables &
Connectors
Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.
Shielding &
Covers
Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
External I/O
Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
Op Panel Lights
Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TCG lights.
Monitor Light
Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
10-10 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-5-6
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Optional Diagnostic Checks
Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1
10-5-7
10-5-7-1
View the Logs
1.) Review the system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.
Probe Maintenance
Probe Related Checks
Table 10-13 Probe Related Checks
Step
1
2
Item Description
Probe Holder
Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Probes
Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins
10-5-7-2
10-5-7-3
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Basic Probe Care
The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals.
For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.
Basic Probe Cleaning
Refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.
To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe.
Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
Chapter 10 10-11
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 10-6
Electrical Safety Tests
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10-6-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC/EN
60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC/EN 60601-1 documents.
THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT
LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT
SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO
PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION
To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION
Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:
• Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way
• Check probe leakage current:
* once a year on surface probes
* twice a year on endocavitary probes
* whenever probe damage is suspected
10-12 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
GEMS Leakage Current Limits
The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment — Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, Table IV.
Table 10-14 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces
Country
USA
Other
Normal Condition
0.1 mA
0.1 mA
Open Ground
0.3 mA
*
0.5 mA
Open Neutral
0.3 mA
0.5 mA
Table 10-15 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes
All Countries
AC
DC**
Normal Condition
0.1 mA
0.01 mA
Open Ground
0.5 mA
0.05 mA
Open Neutral
0.5 mA
0.05 mA
Table 10-16 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG
Connections
Country
USA
Other
Normal Condition
0.01 mA
0.01 mA
Open Ground
0.05mA
0.05 mA
Open Neutral
0.05 mA
0.05 mA
NOTE: *Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1
**Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current.
Chapter 10 10-13
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada
Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Alternate Outlet Tester
The Dale 600 has self-contained lamps designed for testing the outlet wiring arrangement. Plug the
Dale 600 into each outlet to be tested comparing the lamp status.
NOTE:
Combination of
Lights
Condition
CORRECT
WIRING
REVERSE
POLARITY
OPEN
GROUND
Figure 10-2 Dale 600 Outlet Test
OPEN
HOT
HOT/GROUND
REVERSED
No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-14 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10-6-4 Grounding Continuity
CAUTION
Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.
10-6-4-1
Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test
Meter Procedure
Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 3 unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 3 unit.
4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.
5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.
Chapter 10 10-15
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-4-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Dale 600 - Ground Continuity
The Dale 600 measures line cord resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the meter’s
Chassis Cable clamp. Test the grounding continuity of the system to all exposed metal parts in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1 procedure as above. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self tests and operation. Record measured resistance of the grounding continuity. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 (Use any safety analyzer.)
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions
Selector
Neutral
Open/Closed
Normal
Reverse
Polarity
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
Figure 10-4 Dale 600 Ground Continuity Test
10-16 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10-6-5-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.
Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and
Reversed. Record the highest reading.
CAUTION
Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
CAUTION
Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
10-6-5-2 Generic Procedure
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in
Table 10-14 .
Chapter 10 10-17
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-5-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Dale 600 Meter Procedure
When measuring system chassis currents with the Dale 600, always use the CHASSIS selection of the external/chassis function switch. This requires the ground clip lead and changing the meters switches in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self-test and operation. Record the highest leakage current measured.
Follow these steps to test the unit for leakage current.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 3 unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 3.
4.) Set the tester's “FUNCTION” switch to CHASSIS position.
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions
Selector
Neutral
Open/Closed
Normal
Reverse
Polarity
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
10-18
Figure 10-6 Ground and Chassis Leakage Current Test
5.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-17 .
Table 10-17 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST
1
4
5
2
3
CONDITION
Mounting screw for probe receptacle
Wheel support
Mounting screw for CRT housing
Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
6.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site.
Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-5-4
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-14 . Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-18 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Tester Polarity
Switch
Tester Neutral or Ground
Switch
Test 1 Probe
Connector
Screw
Test 2
Metal on
Wheel
Test 3
Screws on
CRT
Housing
Optional Test
4
Rear Panel
Connectors
Optional
Test 5 Unit Power
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
NORM OPEN
ON
ON
NORM
REV
CLOSED
OPEN
REV
NORM
NORM
REV
REV
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
10-6-6
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
10-6-6-1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.
CAUTION
Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
Chapter 10 10-19
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-6-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Generic Procedure
Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
The connection is at service entrance or on the supply side of a separately derived system
POWER
OUTLET
H (Black)
N (White)
Appliance power switch
(use both “off” and “on” positions)
Polarity reversing switch
(use both positions)
Appliance
H
N
G
Internal circuitry
Patient lead selector switch (if any)
(activated as required)
Patient connected leads
Between each patient lead and ground
G (Green)
Building ground
Insulating surface
Current meter
Grounding contact switch (use in both
“open” and “closed” positions)
H = Hot
N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-7 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads
10-6-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure
The Dale 600 provides five snap type ECG buttons for testing patient leads. Snap on all patient leads to the meter and assure that the ground clip is connected to the system’s ground terminal. Select the meter’s LEAD-GND function. Select and test each ECG lead positions (except “ALL”) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in “PATIENT LEAD LEAKAGE” table in the “PM CHECKLIST”. Record the highest leakage current measured for each Power selection.
CAUTION
Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
Follow these steps to test the ECG module for leakage current.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 3 unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 3 unit.
4.) Connect the patient leads to the corresponding snaps located at the upper front of the Dale 600/
600E. Lead nomenclature for this test is not important.
10-20 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-6-3
Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)
ECG
Lead
Selector
ISO
Rocker
Switch
ECG
Patient
Cable
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Figure 10-8 ECG Leakage Current Test
5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO GROUND position to measure the patient lead to ground leakage current.
6.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations.
Table 10-19 Testing Power Conditions
ECG Power
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Meter’s Polarity Switch
NORM
NORM
REVERSE
REVERSE
NORM
NORM
REVERSE
REVERSE
Meter’s Neutral Switch
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
Chapter 10 10-21
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-6-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)
7.) Record the patient lead to ground leakage current measured on the data sheet.
8.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO LEAD position to measure the lead to lead leakage current.
9.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations.
10.)Record the lead to lead leakage current measured on the data sheet.
11.)Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD ISO position to measure the patient lead isolation current.
12.)Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations.
13.)Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST and read the isolation current. To apply the voltage to the lead safely, the voltage is only applied when the rocker switch is depressed to ISO TEST.
14.)Record the patient lead isolation current measured on the data sheet.
10-6-7
10-6-7-1
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured.
Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests
NEUTRAL POLARITY
1.) Closed Normal
2.) Open Normal
3.) Closed Reversed
4.) Open Reversed
10-6-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to
ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION
Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.
10-22 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-8-1
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test and
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test
AC Power
Source
115V
230V
Maximum
Allowance Limit
GROUND OPEN
10uA
GROUND
CLOSED
10uA
500uA 10uA
Table 10-21 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test
AC Power
Source
115V
230V
Maximum
Allowance Limit
20uA
5mA
ECG
Power
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Table 10-22 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
Tester Lead Selector Tester
Polarity
Switch
NORM
REVERSE
NORM
REVERSE
NORM
REVERSE
NORM
REVERSE
Tester
Ground
Switch
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
RL RA LA LL C
Chapter 10 10-23
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test
10-6-9-1
NOTE:
10-6-9-2
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement.
It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.
Test Equipment
Table 10-23 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ™ 3 Service Manual)
Kit
46-285652G1
46-328406G2
Description Contents
Dale 601 -
ULTRASOUND SAFETY
ANALYZER FIELD KIT
for 120V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit
• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER
• Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE
• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
• Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE
Dale 601E -
ULTRASOUND SAFETY
ANALYZER FIELD KIT
for 220V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit
• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
• Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE
• #20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft
• CARRYING CASE and foam padding
• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
10-24 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-9-2
Test Equipment (cont’d)
.
Table 10-24 Test Equipment and Accessory Description
Dale Part number Accessory Name Picture
DALE 600/601/601E Electrical Safety Analyzer
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Dale 601 shown
Description
The DALE60x measures Line
Voltage, Instrument Current, Ground
Resistance, Earth and Chassis
Leakage Current, Patient Lead-to-
Ground, Lead-to-Lead and Lead
Isolation (MAP) Current, External
Gradient, Probe and Transducer
Isolation Current and Point-to-Point
Resistance.
Vendor MODEL
600/100
46-285647P2
CHASSIS CABLE
Used on DALE601/601E to measure earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used as reference lead for external measurement.
Black coil cord with extended length and black grips.
Vendor MODEL
600/102
46-285647P4
Vendor MODEL
600/200
46-285647P6
CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE
CABLE
Black coil cord with needle probe for testing receptacles and for tight spaces.
Also referred to as “Saline Probe” or
“Saline Bath Ground Cable”.
Measures earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used for grounding saline baths for isolation testing of probes.
Used on DALE601/601E. This probe may be substituted for the 600/100
Chassis Cable, and used as a probe instead of a clamp.
Black coiled cord with red grips.
Standard auxiliary cable for external measurements of leakage current and voltage gradient between two surfaces.
Used on DALE601/601E to measure:
• Point-to-Point Leakage Current
• Probe and Transducer Isolation
Current
May only be connected to the female connector of the Analyzer, labeled
EXTERNAL
Chapter 10 10-25
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
10-6-9-3
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Generic Procedure for Leakage Current
Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
SALINE
10-6-9-4
Figure 10-9 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
Meter Procedure Using Dale Meter to Measure Leakage Current
The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use mixture of 1 Litre of H2O (water) with 9 grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current:
1.) Turn OFF the LOGIQ™ 3 unit.
2.) Plug the unit’s mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector.
4.) Set the test meter's “FUNCTION” switch to “CHASSIS” (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE"
(Dale 601).
5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ™ 3 unit.
6.) Put the saline probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.
CAUTION
To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.
7.) Power ON the LOGIQ™ 3 unit.
8.) After the LOGIQ™ 3 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the active probe.
9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-25 for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-15 and
Table 10-16 .
10-26 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4 LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
10-6-9-4Meter Procedure Using Dale Meter to Measure Leakage Current (cont’d)
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-25 .
Power off
CAUTION
Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the
Ultrasound unit is powered on.
Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage.
Table 10-25 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current
Unit Power
Tester Power Polarity
Switch
Start with System Powered OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON
Probe Tested:
Tester NEUTRAL
Switch
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
Tester GROUND
Switch
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
Measurement
ON NORMAL OPEN CLOSED
ON NORMAL OPEN OPEN
Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing
ON
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
Chapter 10 10-27
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
Section 10-7
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
CHASSIS FAILS
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILS
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILS
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILS
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNIT
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILS
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.
10-28 Section 10-7 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
Customer Name: System ID:
System Type
Probe 1: Frequency:
Model Number:
Scan Format*:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Frequency:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Scan Format*:
Dispatch Number / Date Performed:
Serial Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
Model Number:
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Warranty/Contract/HBS
Manufacture Date:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
Serial Number:
* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
Functional Check (if applicable)
B-Mode Function
Doppler Modes Function
CF-Mode Function
M-Mode Function
Applicable Software Options
Applicable Hardware Options
Control Panel
Monitor
Measurement Accuracy
GE Approved Peripherals
OK? or
N/A
PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING
Physical Inspection and Cleaning
(if applicable)
Console
Monitor
Air Filter
Probe Holders
External I/O
Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks
Cables and Connectors
GE Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, Printers)
Inspect Clean
COMMENTS:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 10 10-29
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546-100, R
EVISION
4
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Electrical Test Performed
Max Value
Allowed
Value
Measured OK?
Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Wheel
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Lead to Ground)
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Lead to Lead)
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
Peripheral 2 Leakage Current
Peripheral 2Ground Continuity
Peripheral 3 Leakage Current
Peripheral 3Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number
(from previous page)
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Max Value
Allowed
Max Value
Measured OK?
Comments
Probe 9:
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
10-30 Section 10-7 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
A,B
Applications Software
Loading, 3-37
Backup
Patient Database, 3-33
Preset Configurations, 3-33
Base Load Software
Check Devices, 8-139
Remapping Drive Letters, 8-141
Update, 8-135
Video Adapter Configuration, 8-140
Basic Measurements
Functional Checks, 4-22
Boot Up, 3-12
C
Cine
Functional Checks, 4-24
Color Mode
Overview, 4-19
Connectivity
Worksheet, 3-32
Cooling, 2-2
Customer Assistance, 1-17
E
Electrical Safety, 1-10
EMI Limitations, 2-5
EMI Protection, 3-9
Environmental Conditions
Probes, 2-6
F
Functional Checks
Basic Measurements, 4-22
Image Management, 4-25
Probes/Connector Usage, 4-23
Using Cine, 4-24
I
G
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-2
General Cleaning, 10-9
H
Hazard Icons, 1-5
Human Safety, 1-9
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
Image Management
Functional Checks, 4-25
Installation, 3-1
Installation of Option Software, 8-161
Installation of Software, 8-131
L
Lighting, 2-2
M
Manpower Requirements, 2-6
Mechanical Safety, 1-9
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion, 2-9
Models Covered, 1-2
P
P4 Key Function, 7-4
Power Off, 3-14
Power On, 3-12
Power-up Procedures
Voltage Settings, 3-9
Prepearing the Unit for Installation, 3-9
Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-11
Probes/Connector Usage
Functional Checks, 4-23
Purchaser Responsibilities, 2-7
R
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-3
Regulatory, 6-1
S
Safety Considerations, 1-9
Screen Captures, 7-4
Service Adjustments, 6-1
Shutdown, 3-14
Software
Base Load Update, 8-135
Loading Application, 3-37
System Maintenance, 10-7
T
Time and Manpower Requirements, 2-6
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-3
Troubleshooting
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-2
Screen Captures, 7-4
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-3
Index I
GE H
EALTHCARE
D
IRECTION
5122546 -100, R
EVISION
4
Vital System Information, 7-2
U
Unpacking the Equipment, 3-3, , 3-4
V
Voltage Settings, 3-9
W
Warnings and Cautions, 1-9
LOGIQ™ 3 S
ERVICE
M
ANUAL
II Index
GE Healthcare
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414; Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201, U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Ultraschall:Tel: +49 (0) 212 28 02 208
Deutschland GmbH & Co KG
Beethovenstrabe 239, Postfach 11 05 60
D-42655 Solingen, Germany
Advertisement
Key features
- B-mode imaging
- M-mode imaging
- Color Flow Doppler imaging
- Power Doppler imaging
- Multi-image capability
- Cine loop recording
- Image management
- Back-end processor
- Software configuration
- Peripheral connectivity